WO2023103958A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023103958A1 WO2023103958A1 PCT/CN2022/136579 CN2022136579W WO2023103958A1 WO 2023103958 A1 WO2023103958 A1 WO 2023103958A1 CN 2022136579 W CN2022136579 W CN 2022136579W WO 2023103958 A1 WO2023103958 A1 WO 2023103958A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- access network
- terminal device
- network device
- rlc
- indication information
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
- H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
- H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
- RRC radio resource control
- the terminal device in the connected state can perform data transmission with the access network device, and when the terminal device in the inactive state (or idle state) wants to perform data transmission with the access network device, it needs to complete multiple information interactions to convert to the connected state.
- the terminal equipment in the inactive state needs to switch to the connected state and then transmit data with the access network equipment, it will cause unnecessary power consumption and signaling for small and infrequently transmitted data packets. overhead.
- the present application provides a communication method and device, which are used to implement data transmission of a terminal device in an inactive state, thereby reducing power consumption and signaling overhead of the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the first access network device or a chip in the first access network device, taking the application of the method to the first access network device as an example,
- the first access network device determines first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default radio link control RLC configuration is used; and, sending to the terminal device The first indication information, or, sending the first indication information to a second access network device, where the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- the terminal device after the terminal device receives the first indication information, it can use the default RLC configuration for data transmission in the inactive state according to the first indication information, without switching to the connected state for data transmission, which can effectively reduce the number of terminals. Power consumption and signaling overhead of the device.
- the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and the access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT; for example, the coverage of the terminal device from the first access network device After the area moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and the second access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, so that the first access network device does not need to send the terminal to the second access network device
- the device performs the RLC configuration required by SDT, which reduces the signaling overhead between the first access network device and the second access network device, and improves resource utilization; The process of sending the RLC configuration by the access network device, so as to improve the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
- sending the first indication information to the terminal device includes: sending a first radio resource control RRC release message to the terminal device, where the first RRC release message is used to indicate the The terminal device enters an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information.
- sending the first indication information to the second access network device includes: sending a first paging message to the second access network device, where the first paging message is used to instructing the second access network device to page the terminal device, where the first paging message includes the first indication information.
- the first indication information corresponds to the first area, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; wherein , the first region includes RNA of the terminal device.
- the first area includes one or more cells
- the first indication information includes identities of the one or more cells.
- the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the M RLC layer entities use the default RLC configuration, M is a positive integer.
- the first indication information includes an identifier of a first radio bearer
- the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the first radio bearer
- the first indication information includes at least one RLC mode
- the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities using the at least one RLC mode.
- the first indication information corresponds to a transmission direction, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration in the transmission direction.
- the method further includes: receiving capability information from the second access network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
- the method further includes: sending a first RLC protocol data unit PDU to the second access network device, where the first RLC PDU is used by the first access network device obtained through default RLC configuration processing; wherein, the first RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to indicate that the terminal device ends in the inactive data transmission in the active state and continue to remain in the inactive state.
- the method further includes: receiving a second RLC PDU from the second access network device, the second RLC PDU including uplink data of the terminal device; using the default RLC Configuring to process the second RLC PDU to obtain the first PDCP PDU.
- the method further includes: sending third indication information to the second access network device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using the stored RLC configuration included in the context information.
- the method further includes: sending second indication information to the second access network device, the second indication information instructing the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration communicate with the terminal device.
- the method further includes: receiving a second PDCP PDU from the second access network device, where the second PDCP PDU is the second access network device using the default RLC obtained through configuration processing; wherein, the second PDCP PDU includes uplink data of the terminal device.
- the method further includes: sending anchor relocation information and context information of the terminal device to the second access network device, where the anchor relocation information is used to indicate not to execute Anchor point relocation, the context information does not include part or all of the RLC configuration of the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the second access network device or a chip in the second access network device, taking the application of the method to the second access network device as an example,
- the second access network device receives second instruction information from the first access network device, where the second instruction information instructs the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device; And, according to the second instruction information, use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device; wherein, the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the first Two access network devices are located on the RNA of the terminal device.
- receiving a first paging message from the first access network device, where the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device The first paging message includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the default RLC configuration is used; according to the first paging message, sending a second A paging message, where the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
- the method further includes: sending a third RLC PDU to the terminal device, where the third RLC PDU is obtained through processing by the second access network device using the default RLC configuration; Wherein, the third RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue remain in the inactive state.
- the method further includes: receiving a fourth RLC PDU from the terminal device, the fourth RLC PDU including the uplink data of the terminal device or an RRC recovery request message; using the default The RLC configuration processes the fourth RLC PDU to obtain a third PDCP PDU.
- the method further includes: sending third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using the stored context information of the terminal device.
- the method further includes: receiving second anchor relocation information from the first access network device and second context information of the terminal device, the second anchor relocation information It is used to indicate that anchor point relocation is not performed, and the second context information does not include part or all of the RLC configuration of the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a terminal device or a chip in a terminal device.
- the terminal device receives The first instruction information of the network access device or the second access network device, the first instruction information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; according to the first instruction information, use the The default RLC configuration communicates with the first access network device and/or the second access network device; wherein the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, so The second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- the receiving the first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device includes: receiving a first RRC release message from the first access network device, The first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, receiving a second request from the second access network device A paging message, the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
- the method further includes: receiving capability information from the second access network device, the The capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
- using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes: receiving a fifth RLC PDU from the second access network device, the fifth RLC PDU It is obtained by the first access network device or the second access network device using the default RLC configuration processing; wherein the fifth RLC PDU includes the downlink data of the terminal device or the second RRC release message , the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue to maintain in the inactive state.
- using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes: sending a sixth RLC PDU to the second access network device, and the sixth RLC PDU is Obtained by using the default RLC configuration processing, the sixth RLC PDU includes an RRC recovery request message or uplink data.
- the method further includes: receiving third indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, the third indication information indicating that the terminal device Switch to use the RLC configuration included in the stored context information of the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be applied to a CU or a chip in the CU. Take the application of the method to the CU as an example.
- the CU determines first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and, the CU sends the first indication information.
- the CU sending the first indication information includes: the CU sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU, and the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the In an active state, the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message is used to indicate that the second access network device
- the network access device pages the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a third paging message through the DU, and the third paging message uses For paging the terminal device, the third paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends the first indication information to the DU.
- the CU receives first indication information from the DU, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and the CU sends the first indication information.
- the CU sending the first indication information includes: the CU sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU, and the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the In an active state, the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message is used to indicate that the second access network device
- the network access device pages the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a third paging message through the DU, and the third paging message uses For paging the terminal device, the third paging message includes the first indication information.
- the method further includes: sending a request message to the
- the CU receives second indication information from the first access network device, the second indication information indicating that the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device; and the CU sends the second indication information to the DU.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a DU or a chip in the DU, taking the application of the method to the DU as an example.
- the DU receives a first RRC release message or a third paging message from a CU, and the first RRC release message or the third paging message includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in In the inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the inactive state, and the third paging message is used to page the terminal device; and, the DU sends the terminal device The device sends the first RRC release message or the third paging message.
- the method further includes: a DU receiving the first indication information from the CU.
- the DU determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and, the DU sends the first indication information to the CU.
- the determining of the first indication information by the DU includes: the DU receives a request message from the CU; and, according to the request message, determines the first indication information.
- the DU receives second indication information from the CU, where the second indication information indicates that the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device; and, according to the second indication information, the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device. End devices communicate.
- the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a first access network device or a chip set in the first access network device.
- the communication device has the function of realizing the first aspect above, for example, the communication device includes modules or units or means corresponding to the operations involved in the first aspect above, and the modules, units or means can be realized by software , or be realized by hardware, and may also be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware.
- the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices; the processing unit can be used to perform the communication Some internal operations of the device.
- the functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the first aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory.
- the memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions referred to in the first aspect above.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the first aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the above first aspect.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the first aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any possible design or implementation in the first aspect above. method.
- the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a second access network device or a chip set in the second access network device.
- the communication device has the function of realizing the second aspect above, for example, the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the operations involved in the second aspect above, and the module, unit or means can be implemented by software, or by Hardware implementation, and corresponding software implementation may also be executed by hardware.
- the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices; the processing unit can be used to perform the communication Some internal operations of the device.
- the functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the second aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory.
- the memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions referred to in the second aspect above.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device implements the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the second aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the second aspect above.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device implements the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the second aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any possible design or implementation of the second aspect above. method.
- the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a terminal device or a chip disposed in the terminal device.
- the communication device is equipped with the functions involved in the third aspect above, for example, the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the operations involved in the third aspect above, and the function, unit or means can be implemented by software, or It can be realized by hardware, and corresponding software can also be realized by executing hardware.
- the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to send The device sends system information; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device.
- the functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the third aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory.
- the memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions mentioned in the above third aspect.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner of the third aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the above third aspect.
- the processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner of the third aspect above.
- the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the method in any possible design or implementation of the third aspect above .
- the processor can be implemented by hardware or by software.
- the processor can be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software
- the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is realized by reading software codes stored in the memory.
- there may be one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the memory can be integrated with the processor, or the memory can be separated from the processor.
- the memory and the processor can be integrated on the same chip, or they can be respectively arranged on different chips.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the arrangement of the memory and the processor.
- the present application provides a communication system, which may include the communication device provided in the sixth aspect above, the communication device provided in the seventh aspect above, and the communication device provided in the eighth aspect above.
- the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer-readable instructions are stored in the computer-readable medium, and when a computer reads and executes the computer-readable instructions, the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible design of the fifth aspect.
- the present application provides a computer program product.
- the computer reads and executes the computer program product, the computer executes the method in any possible design of the first aspect to the fifth aspect.
- the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, and is used to read and execute a software program stored in the memory, so as to realize the first to the first aspects above Any one of five possible design approaches.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 2A is an example diagram of a protocol layer structure between a terminal device and a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram of another CU-DU separation architecture provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3A is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a four-step random access process provided in an embodiment of the present application;
- FIG. 3B is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a two-step random access process provided in an embodiment of the present application;
- FIG. 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a terminal device performing data transmission in an inactive state provided by an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5C are schematic flowcharts corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;
- FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application.
- Fig. 11 is a possible exemplary block diagram of the device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system 1000 includes a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) 100 and a core network (core network, CN) 200, optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include a data network (data network, DN) )300.
- radio access network radio access network
- core network core network
- DN data network
- the RAN100, CN100, and DN300 involved in FIG. 1 will be described in detail below.
- the RAN100 may include at least one radio access network device (also referred to as an access network device, such as 110a and 110b in Figure 1), and may also include at least one terminal device (such as 120a-120j in Figure 1), the terminal device It can be connected with wireless access network equipment in a wireless manner.
- the terminal device and the terminal device and the access network device and the access network device may be connected to each other in a wired or wireless manner.
- a terminal device may also be called a terminal, a user equipment (user equipment, UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like.
- Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (internet of things, IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
- Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
- the access network equipment can be a base station, an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), a next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in a 5G communication system, a sixth generation (6th generation generation, 6G) next-generation base station in the communication system, base station in the future communication system or access node in the WiFi system, etc.; it can also be a module or unit that completes the function of the base station.
- the access network device may be a macro base station (such as 110a in Figure 1), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in Figure 1), or a relay node or a donor node.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form adopted by the access network equipment.
- the access network equipment and the terminal equipment may be fixed or mobile.
- Access network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and artificial satellites in the air.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of the access network device and the terminal device.
- the roles of access network equipment and terminal equipment can be relative.
- the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 1 can be configured as a mobile access network equipment.
- 120i is an access network device; but for the first access network device 10a, 120i is a terminal device, that is, communication between 110a and 120i is performed through a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, communication between 110a and 120i may also be performed through an interface protocol between access network devices. At this time, compared to 110a, 120i is also an access network device. Therefore, both the access network equipment and the terminal equipment can be collectively referred to as communication devices, 110a and 110b in FIG. 1 can be referred to as communication devices with access network equipment functions, and 120a-120j in FIG. functional communication device.
- the functions of the access network equipment may also be performed by modules (such as chips) in the access network equipment, or may be performed by a control subsystem including the functions of the access network equipment.
- the control subsystem including the functions of the access network equipment may be the control center in the above application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart city.
- the functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or may be performed by a device including the terminal function.
- the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) ) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer (physical layer, PHY);
- the user plane protocol layer structure may include PDCP layer, RLC layer , a MAC layer, and a physical layer.
- a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer may also be included above the PDCP layer.
- the SDAP layer, the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the physical layer may also be collectively referred to as an access layer.
- 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
- the data needs to pass through the user plane protocol layer, such as the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer.
- the data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB) is established between the access network device and the terminal device to transmit data, and each DRB may correspond to a group of functional entity sets, for example, the functional entity set may include a A PDCP layer entity, at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, at least one MAC layer entity corresponding to the at least one RLC layer entity, and at least one physical layer entity corresponding to the at least one MAC layer entity.
- Downlink data transmission is taken as an example, and FIG. 2A schematically shows that downlink data is transmitted between layers.
- FIG. 2A shows that downlink data is transmitted between layers.
- the SDAP layer entity of the access network device obtains the data, it can identify (QoS flow indicator, QFI) according to the quality of service (quality of service, QoS) of the data.
- QFI quality of service
- the data is mapped to the PDCP layer entity of the corresponding DRB, and the PDCP layer entity can transmit the data to at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, and then at least one RLC layer entity is transmitted to the corresponding MAC layer entity, and then the MAC layer
- the entity generates a transmission block, and then wirelessly transmits it through the corresponding physical layer entity, so as to send it to the terminal device.
- the downlink data can be correspondingly encapsulated in each layer of the access network equipment, and the data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (service data unit, SDU) of the layer, and passed through the layer After encapsulation, it becomes a protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU), and then passed to the next layer.
- service data unit service data unit
- PDU protocol data unit
- the data received by the PDCP layer entity from the SDAP layer can be called PDCP SDU.
- the PDCP PDU After the PDCP layer entity encapsulates the PDCP SDU, the PDCP PDU is obtained and sent to the RLC layer; the PDCP PDU received by the RLC layer entity from the PDCP layer can be called RLC SDU, after the RLC layer entity encapsulates the RLC SDU, obtains the RLC PDU and sends it to the MAC layer.
- data can be transmitted between different layers through corresponding channels, for example, data can be transmitted between RLC layer entities and MAC layer entities through a logical channel (logical channel, LCH), and between MAC layer entities and physical layer entities can be transmitted through Transport channel (transport channel) to transmit data.
- LCH logical channel
- Transport channel transport channel
- the signaling needs to pass through the control plane protocol layer, such as the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer.
- the control plane protocol layer such as the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer.
- at least one signaling radio bearer (signalling radio bearer, SRB) is established between the access network device and the terminal device to transmit signaling.
- the SRB and the DRB may be collectively referred to as a radio bearer (radio bearer, RB).
- FIG. 2A shows a schematic diagram of RRC message transmission between layers.
- the RRC layer entity of the access network device after the RRC layer entity of the access network device generates the RRC message, it can submit the RRC message to the PDCP layer entity of the corresponding SRB, and the PDCP layer entity can transmit the RRC message to to at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, and then transmitted by at least one RLC layer entity to the corresponding MAC layer entity, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transmission block, and then performs wireless transmission through the corresponding physical layer entity to send to the terminal device.
- the physical layer of the terminal device receives the transmission block from the access network device, it can submit it to the upper layer sequentially from the physical layer, and corresponding decapsulation can be performed in each layer. That is to say, the processing performed by each layer in the terminal device may be a reverse process of the processing performed by each layer in the access network device.
- the access network equipment may include one or more centralized units (centralized unit, CU) and one or more distributed units (distributed unit, DU), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
- centralized unit CU
- distributed unit distributed unit
- multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
- Such an architecture may be referred to as a CU-DU separation architecture.
- the interface between the CU and the DU may be called an F1 interface, where a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be F1-U.
- the processing functions of CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2B, the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as RLC layer and MAC layer, etc.) are set at DU.
- the above-mentioned division of the processing functions of CU and DU according to the protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided according to other methods.
- the functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are set in the CU, the RLC layer and the following protocols
- the function of the layer is set in the DU.
- the CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers.
- the CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with the protocol layer. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
- the function of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities.
- the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and realized by different entities, which are the control plane CU entity (ie, the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (ie, the CU-UP entity). ), the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the RAN device.
- the interface between CU-CP entity and CU-UP entity can be E1 interface
- the interface between CU-CP entity and DU can be F1-C interface
- the interface between CU-UP entity and DU can be F1-U interface.
- FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram of the distribution of an air interface protocol stack.
- the air interface protocol stack can be RLC, MAC, and PHY in the DU, and PDCP and above protocol layers in the CU.
- the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU.
- the DU can directly encapsulate the signaling through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU without parsing the signaling.
- the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario.
- signaling at the RRC or PDCP layer will eventually be processed as data at the physical layer and sent to the terminal device, or converted from received data at the physical layer.
- the signaling at the RRC or PDCP layer can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or sent by the DU and the radio frequency device.
- CN200 may include multiple core network elements, and wireless access network equipment may be connected to the core network elements in a wireless or wired manner.
- the core network element and the radio access network device can be independent and different physical devices, or the functions of the core network element and the logical functions of the radio access network device can be integrated on the same physical device, or they can be a
- the physical device integrates some functions of core network elements and some functions of radio access network devices.
- the core network elements in CN200 can include session management function (session management function, SMF) network elements, user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network elements, policy control function (policy control function, PCF) network elements, application function (application function, AF) network elements, etc.
- session management function session management function
- UPF user plane function
- policy control function policy control function
- PCF policy control function
- application function application function, AF
- the DN300 may also be called a packet data network (packet data network, PDN), which is a network outside the operator's network.
- PDN packet data network
- Application servers corresponding to various services can be deployed in DN300 to provide various possible services for terminal equipment.
- FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and the RAN of the communication system may also include other access network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices.
- the state of the terminal device may include RRC idle state, RRC inactive state and RRC connected state.
- the RRC idle state may be referred to as the idle state for short
- the RRC inactive state may be referred to as the inactive state for short
- the third state and the RRC connected state may be referred to as the connected state for short.
- the coverage area of the access network device may include one or more cells.
- the first access network device may instruct the terminal device to switch from the connected state to the inactive state.
- the first access network device may send an RRC release message to the terminal device, and the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device may enter the inactive state after receiving the RRC release message.
- the RRC connection between the inactive terminal device and the first access network device is disconnected, but the context information of the terminal device is still stored in the first access network device.
- the first access network device can also be called It is the access network device that the terminal device is connected to last, or the access network device that finally serves the terminal device.
- RAN-based notification area (RAN-based notification area, RNA)
- the first access network device may configure RNA for the terminal device, and send RNA configuration information to the terminal device.
- the RRC release message sent by the first access network device to the terminal device may include RNA configuration information.
- the RNA may include one or more cells, and the RNA configuration information includes at least one of the following: 1) The identity of one or more cells, where multiple cells may belong to one access network device or multiple access network devices, such as RNA Including the cell a1 of the first access network device and the cell b1 of the second access network device, the RNA configuration information may include the identification of the cell a1 and the cell b1; 2) at least one RAN tracking area code (RAN tracking area code), A RAN tracking area may include one or more cells. When a RAN tracking area includes multiple cells, the multiple cells may belong to one access network device or multiple access network devices.
- RNA timer of the terminal device When the terminal device moves within the RNA, there is no need for RNA update; when the RNA timer of the terminal device times out or the terminal device moves out of the RNA, the terminal device needs to initiate an access network notification area update (RAN-based notification area update, RANU) process.
- RAN-based notification area update RANU
- the first access network device may, according to the RNA configured for the terminal device, Paging is performed in the cell a1 of the network device and the cell b1) of the second access network device. Specifically, the first access network device may send a paging message in the cell a1, and send a RAN paging (XnAP RAN Paging) message to the second access network device corresponding to the cell b1 through the Xn interface.
- XnAP RAN Paging RAN paging
- the first access network device may send a RAN paging message to the second access network device; correspondingly, after receiving the RAN paging message, the second access network device may determine the RAN paging message according to the RAN paging message. paging area, and then paging terminal equipment in the RAN paging area.
- the RAN paging area determined by the second access network device may include one or more cells, the one or more cells are the cells of the second access network device, and the one or more cells belong to the RNA of the terminal device .
- each of the multiple access network devices can page the terminal device in its respective RAN paging area.
- the RAN paging message may be used to notify the access network device to page the terminal device, and the RAN paging message may include the identifier of the terminal device.
- the RAN paging message may also include RAN paging area information, and then the second access network device may The RAN paging area information determines the RAN paging area.
- the paging message may be used for paging the terminal device, and the paging message may include a paging record list (PagingRecordlist), and the paging record list includes the identifiers of one or more terminal devices that need to be paged.
- the inactive terminal device can initiate a random access process to the access network device if it is determined that the terminal device's identifier is included in the paging record list; if it is determined that the paging record list does not include the If the identification of the terminal equipment is not used, the paging message can continue to be received in the next paging cycle.
- the terminal device when the terminal device is in the inactive state, if it wants to perform data transmission, it needs to restore the RRC connection and switch to the connected state before data transmission can be performed.
- the data packets required to be transmitted by an inactive terminal device are usually very small (that is, small data (SD)), and if the RRC connection establishment process occurs every time the terminal device performs data transmission, To transition from an inactive state to a connected state, unnecessary power consumption and signaling overhead are incurred.
- the terminal equipment transmits data in an inactive state. For example, the terminal equipment can send small data to the access network equipment and/or receive access The small data sent by the network equipment, that is, small data transmission (SDT).
- SDT small data transmission
- SDT SDT
- smartphone-related services such as application (APP) heartbeat packets or push messages
- non-smartphone-related services such as periodic data of wearable devices (such as heartbeat packets), periodic data sent by industrial wireless sensor networks, etc.
- APP application
- non-smartphone-related services such as periodic data of wearable devices (such as heartbeat packets), periodic data sent by industrial wireless sensor networks, etc.
- the specific size of the small data may not be limited in the embodiment of the present application, for example, a data packet of 100-300 bytes may be considered as small data.
- the data transmission described in the following embodiments of the present application may refer to SDT, and the uplink data and downlink data described in the embodiments of the present application may both be small data.
- the terminal device can perform SDT through the random access process. For example, the terminal device sends uplink data to the access network device (the first access network device or the second access network device) and/or receives the downlink data during the random access process. data.
- the random access procedure may include a four-step random access procedure and a two-step random access procedure.
- the terminal device can send uplink data through message 3 in the four-step random access process, and/or receive downlink data through message 4; or, the terminal device can also send uplink data through message A in the two-step random access process, and /or receive downlink data through message B.
- FIG. 3A is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a four-step random access process. As shown in Figure 3A, including:
- the access network device sends configuration information through a system message, the configuration information is used to configure physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH) resources corresponding to the SDT and/or the preamble corresponding to the SDT, and the PRACH resources are used for Bearer preamble.
- the terminal device can receive configuration information from the access network device.
- the terminal device sends a random access request message to the access network device, where the random access request message may include a preamble; correspondingly, the access network device receives the random access request message from the terminal device.
- the random access request message may be called the first message or message 1 (Msg1) of the four-step random access procedure.
- the preamble included in Msg1 may be a preamble corresponding to SDT, and/or, the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in Msg1 may be a PRACH resource corresponding to SDT.
- the access network device sends a random access response (random access response, RAR) message to the terminal device according to the random access request message; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the random access response message from the access network device.
- RAR random access response
- the random access response message may be called the second message or message 2 (Msg2) of the four-step random access procedure.
- the terminal device sends an uplink message to the access device according to the random access response message; correspondingly, the access network device receives the uplink message from the terminal device.
- the uplink message may be called the third message or message 3 (Msg3) of the four-step random access procedure.
- the uplink message may include an RRC recovery request message, and optionally, may also include uplink data.
- the access network device sends a downlink message to the terminal device according to Msg3; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the downlink message from the access network device.
- the downlink message may be called the fourth message or message 4 (Msg4) of the four-step random access procedure.
- the downlink message may include downlink data.
- the above 301-a to 304-a are a four-step random access process, and the terminal device and the access network device can perform data transmission during the four-step random access process.
- the terminal device can Send uplink data to the access network device.
- the access network device may send downlink data to the terminal device.
- the terminal device and the access network device can continue to perform data transmission, for example, the access network device can schedule the terminal device to send uplink data through dynamic scheduling, and for example The terminal device may send uplink data based on configured grant (configured grant, CG) resources.
- step 305-a may be performed.
- the access network device may determine that the SDT is about to be completed. For example, the access network device may determine whether the SDT is about to be completed according to a buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR) reported by the terminal device.
- BSR buffer status report
- the access network device sends an RRC release message to the terminal device, and the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and remain in an inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC release message from the access network device, And release the message according to the RRC, end the SDT and keep in the inactive state.
- the access network device sends an RRC recovery message to the terminal device, and the RRC recovery message is used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and switch to the connected state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC recovery message from the access network device, and according to the RRC Recovery message transitions to connected state.
- the access network device may also send an RRC release message or an RRC recovery message to the terminal device through Msg4 (that is, merge S305-a into S304-a).
- S301-a to S305-a may be referred to as an SDT process.
- FIG. 3B is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a two-step random access process. As shown in Figure 3B, including:
- the access network device sends configuration information through a system message.
- the configuration information can be used to configure the PRACH resource corresponding to the SDT and/or the preamble corresponding to the SDT, and can also be used to configure a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel) , PUSCH) resources.
- the terminal device can receive configuration information from the access network device.
- the terminal device sends a random access request message to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the random access request message from the terminal device.
- the random access request message may be referred to as message A (MsgA) of the two-step random access procedure.
- MsgA may include a preamble and an RRC recovery request message, and may also include uplink data (the uplink data may be carried in the PUSCH resource configured by the configuration information in S300-b).
- the access network device sends a downlink message to the terminal device according to the MsgA, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the downlink message from the access network device.
- the downlink message may be called message B (MsgB) of the two-step random access procedure, and MsgB is a response message of MsgA.
- MsgB may include downlink data.
- the above 301-b to 302-b are the two-step random access process, wherein the terminal device and the access network device can perform data transmission during the two-step random access process. After performing the two-step random access process, the terminal device and the access network device can continue to perform data transmission (that is, SDT).
- SDT data transmission
- step 303-b may be performed, and the specific implementation of S303-b is the same as that of S305-a.
- the access network device can also send an RRC release message or an RRC recovery message to the terminal device through MsgB (that is, merge S303-b into 302-b).
- S301-b to S303-b may be referred to as an SDT process.
- an SDT process from the terminal device sending the random access preamble (or RRC recovery request message) to the terminal device receiving the RRC release message (used to instruct the terminal device to end SDT and continue to remain in the inactive state ) or an RRC recovery message (used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and switch to the connected state) can be called an SDT process.
- Scenario 1 After the terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, when the terminal device needs to send uplink data to the second access network device, an SDT process may be initiated.
- the SDT process may be referred to as a mobile originated-small data transmission (MO-SDT) process.
- MO-SDT mobile originated-small data transmission
- the first access network device receives the downlink data of the terminal device from the core network device, and needs to send the downlink data to the terminal device, then the first access network device can page the terminal device in the RNA configured for the terminal device .
- the first access network device may send a RAN paging message to the second access network device, and then the second access network device
- the network device can send a paging message to page the terminal device according to the RAN paging message.
- the terminal device may initiate an SDT process.
- the SDT process may be referred to as a mobile terminated-small data transmission (mobile terminated-small data transmission, MT-SDT) process.
- the RLC configuration can include the parameters corresponding to the RLC layer entity.
- the RLC configuration can include the parameters used by the RLC layer entity to process the RLC SDU received from the upper layer, and when the RLC layer entity processes the RLC PDU received from the lower layer. parameters used.
- the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device refers to the RLC configuration included in the context information of the terminal device.
- the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device may be provided to the terminal device by the first access network device, and the dedicated RLC configuration of different terminal devices may be different.
- the default RLC configuration refers to the RLC configuration pre-configured in the access network device (such as the first access network device, the second access network device) and the terminal device.
- the default RLC configuration of different terminal devices can be the same, that is, the default RLC configuration It can be shared by multiple terminal devices.
- the first access network device can store the dedicated RLC configuration and the default RLC configuration of the terminal device
- the second Second, the access network device may store a default RLC configuration and not store a dedicated RLC configuration for the terminal device.
- the default RLC configuration can include the default RLC configuration corresponding to uplink transmission (called uplink default RLC configuration) and the default RLC configuration corresponding to downlink transmission (called downlink default RLC configuration). ).
- the uplink default RLC configuration is used to process uplink data. For example, when a terminal device sends uplink data to the second access network device, the terminal device can use the uplink default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU.
- the second access network device can use the uplink default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU.
- the downlink default RLC configuration is used to process downlink data.
- the second access network device can use the downlink default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and send the RLC PDU to the terminal device;
- the terminal device can use the downlink default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
- the transmission mode used by RLC layer entities can include unacknowledged mode (unacknowledged mode, UM) and acknowledged mode (acknowledged mode, AM), so , the default RLC configuration may include a default RLC configuration corresponding to UM (called UM default RLC configuration) and a default RLC configuration corresponding to AM (called AM default RLC configuration).
- UM default RLC configuration a default RLC configuration corresponding to UM
- AM default RLC configuration corresponding to AM
- the transmission mode used by the RLC layer entity may also include other possible transmission modes, and in the embodiment of the present application, UM and AM are taken as examples for description.
- the RLC layer entity can process the SDU submitted to the RLC layer entity (such as adding additional information), and then send the RLC PDU without confirmation from the peer entity, nor Then retransmit.
- the transmission mode used by the RLC layer entity is AM
- the RLC layer entity can process the SDU submitted to the RLC layer entity (such as adding additional information), and then send the RLC PDU, and requires the confirmation of the peer entity, if the peer If the entity confirms that the RLC PDU has been successfully received, it does not need to retransmit the RLC PDU, otherwise it needs to retransmit the RLC PDU.
- the default RLC configuration may include: uplink UM default RLC configuration, uplink AM default RLC configuration, downlink UM default RLC configuration, and downlink AM default RLC configuration.
- 1 the uplink UM default RLC configuration may include: sn-FieldLength.
- Uplink AM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-PollRetransmit, pollPDU, pollByte, maxRetxThrehold.
- the downlink UM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-Reassembly.
- the downlink AM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-Reassembly, t-StatusProhibit.
- the communication between the access network device and the terminal device involves the PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, physical layer and other protocol layers.
- the RLC layer the RLC layer entity of the terminal device or the access network device
- the RLC SDU (or PDCP PDU) received from the upper layer (PDCP layer) can be processed to obtain the RLC PDU and submitted to the lower layer
- the RLC PDU (or MAC SDU) received from the lower layer (MAC layer) can also be processed. ) to obtain the RLC SDU and submit it to the upper layer.
- the processing performed by the RLC layer entity on the PDCP PDU received from the upper layer is called the first processing
- the processing performed by the RLC layer entity on the RLC PDU received from the lower layer is called the second processing.
- Two processing, the second processing is the reverse process of the first processing.
- the terminal device sends the RLC PDU
- the access network device sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device
- the following description may be involved when describing the communication between the first access network device and the second access network device in the following embodiments of this application : "The first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device", "the first access network device sends an RLC PDU to the second access network device", etc.
- the terminal device sends the RLC PDU to the access network device may mean that the RLC layer entity of the terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the lower layer for sending to the access network device.
- the RLC layer entity of the terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transport block, and then sends it to the access network device through the corresponding physical layer entity.
- the access network device sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device may mean that the RLC layer entity of the access network device submits the RLC PDU to the lower layer for sending to the terminal device.
- the RLC layer entity of the access network device submits the RLC PDU to the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transport block, and then sends it to the terminal device through the corresponding physical layer entity.
- the first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device may mean that the first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device through the Xn interface; "the first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device; "The second access network device sends the RLC PDU” may refer to that the first access network device sends the RLC PDU to the second access network device through the Xn interface.
- Anchor point relocation can be understood as: when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the relocation of the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created for the terminal device by the network side. Before anchor relocation is performed, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the network side for the terminal device is located in the first access network device, that is, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer is created by the first access network device for the terminal device; For example, before the terminal device enters the inactive state, the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the first access network device. At this time, the first access network device may create a PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer for the terminal device.
- the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the network side for the terminal device is located on the second access network device, that is, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the second access network device for the terminal device ;
- the second access network device may execute anchor relocation instructions from the first access network device and the terminal device's The context information is used to create the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer for the terminal device.
- the first access network device may release the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer previously created for the terminal device.
- a possible solution provided by the embodiment of this application is that when the terminal device is in the inactive state, the terminal device and the access network device (such as the first access network device or the second access network device) network equipment) can use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal equipment for data transmission.
- the terminal device and the access network device such as the first access network device or the second access network device
- the terminal device performs data transmission with the first access network device.
- the terminal device can use a dedicated RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU, and send the RLC PDU to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first After receiving the RLC PDU, the access network device can use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain uplink data.
- the terminal device may perform data transmission with the second access network device.
- the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing the uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and convert the RLC The PDU is sent to the second access network device.
- the second access network device Since the second access network device does not store the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, the second access network device needs to first obtain the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device from the first access network device, and then use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to The received RLC PDU is subjected to the second processing to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parsed to obtain the uplink data.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of data transmission performed by a terminal device in an inactive state provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the process can include:
- the first access network device sends an RRC release message 1 to the terminal device, where the RRC release message 1 is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC release message 1.
- the terminal device moves from the coverage area of the first access network device to the coverage area of the second access network device, and sends an RRC recovery request message to the second access network device.
- the terminal device may send message 3 in the four-step random access process or message A in the two-step random access process to the second access network device, where message 3 or message A includes the RRC recovery request message.
- the second access network device After receiving the RRC recovery request message, the second access network device sends a UE context request (retrieve UE context request) message to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device may receive the UE context request request message.
- the UE context request message may include an inactive-radio network temporary identity (inactive-radio network temporary identity, I-RNTI) of the terminal device, and then the first access network device may determine the terminal device according to the I-RNTI contextual information.
- I-RNTI active-radio network temporary identity
- the first access network device judges whether to perform anchor relocation, if it is determined to perform anchor relocation, perform S405-a to S410-a, if it determines not to perform anchor relocation, perform S405-b to S408 -b.
- the first access network device sends a UE context retrieval response (retrieve UE context response) message to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network device receives the UE context retrieval response message.
- the UE context request response may include context information of the terminal device and anchor relocation information 1, where the anchor relocation information 1 is used to indicate execution of anchor relocation.
- the context information includes the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, and then the second access network device can acquire the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device from the context information.
- the second access network device performs path switching, for example, the second access network device sends a path switching request message to the AMF network element, and correspondingly, the AMF network element receives the path switching request message.
- the AMF network element sends a path switch response message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device receives the path switch response message, and then completes the path switch.
- path switching means that the data transmission path of the terminal device is switched from "UPF network element-first access network device-terminal device" to "UPF network element-second access network device-terminal device”. That is to say, after path switching, the downlink data can be sent by the UPF network element to the second access network device, and then sent by the second access network device to the terminal device; the uplink data can be sent by the terminal device to the second access network device. network equipment, and then sent to the UPF network element by the second access network equipment.
- the second access network device sends address indication information to the first access network device.
- the address indication information indicates the address where the first access network device forwards data (that is, downlink data).
- the first access network device receives the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element before the path switching, it can forward the downlink data to the second access network device according to the address indication information, and the second access network device The device sends to the end device.
- the second access network device and the terminal device use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform data transmission.
- the terminal device can use a dedicated RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU, and then send the RLC PDU to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network
- the device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parse the downlink data, and send the downlink data to the UPF network element.
- the second access network device may receive the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element (optionally, the second access network device may also receive the downlink data of the terminal device from the first access network device) , and use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and then send the RLC PDU to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU Obtain PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
- the second access network device when the second access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate an RRC release message 2, and use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing the RRC release message 2 to obtain an RLC PDU, and then Sent to the terminal equipment, the RRC release message 2 is used to instruct the terminal equipment to end the SDT and remain in an inactive state.
- the terminal device can receive the RLC PDU, use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then analyze and obtain the RRC release message 2, and end the SDT according to the RRC release message 2 and continue to remain in the inactive state.
- the first access network device sends a failure response message to the second access network device.
- the failure response message includes context information of the terminal device and anchor relocation information 2, and the anchor relocation information 2 is used to indicate that Perform anchor relocation.
- the first access network device performs data transmission by using the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device through the second access network device and the terminal device.
- the terminal device may use dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and send it to the second access network device.
- the second access network device receives the RLC PDU, uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to process the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and sends the PDCP PDU to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the PDCP PDU, parses to obtain the uplink data, and then sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
- the UPF network element For downlink transmission, the UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the downlink data, and sends a PDCP PDU containing the downlink data to the second access network device.
- the second access network device receives the PDCP PDU, uses dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the RLC PDU, uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to process the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parses to obtain the downlink data.
- the first access network device may generate an RRC release message 2, and send a PDCP PDU containing the RRC release message 2 to the second access network device; wherein, the RRC release message 2 is used for Instructs the end device to end data transmission and to remain inactive.
- the second access network device uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU including the RRC release message 2 to obtain the RLC PDU, and then sends it to the terminal device.
- the terminal device can receive the RLC PDU, use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then analyze and obtain the RRC release message 2, and end the data transmission according to the RRC release message 2 and continue to remain in the inactive state.
- the terminal device and the access network device can use the default RLC configuration for data transmission.
- Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2 below describe some possible implementations in which the terminal device and the access network device use the default RLC configuration for data transmission.
- 5A to 5C are schematic flowcharts corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application. Wherein, S501 to S504 in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5C are the same.
- the first access network device determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that a default RLC configuration is used when the terminal device is in an inactive state.
- the first access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
- the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device in various ways, one possible way is: the first access network device sends the first RRC release message to the terminal device, and the second An RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal equipment to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes first indication information.
- the terminal device may receive the first RRC release message, and obtain the first indication information.
- the terminal device may be in a connected state or in an inactive state before receiving the first RRC release message. The connected state is converted to the inactive state; if the terminal device is in the inactive state before receiving the first RRC release message, the terminal device may continue to remain in the inactive state according to the first RRC release message.
- the first access network device sends the first indication information to the second access network device.
- the first access network device receives the terminal device from the core network device (this When the terminal device is in an inactive state), the downlink data needs to be sent to the terminal device, then the first access network device can page the terminal device in the RNA configured for the terminal device. For example, if the RNA configured by the first access network device for the terminal device includes the cell of the second access network device, the first access network device may send a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message The message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device, and the first paging message includes the first indication information.
- the second access network device may send a second paging message in the cell of the second access network device, the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device.
- the paging message includes first indication information and an identifier of the terminal device.
- the first access network device may also send a third paging message, the third paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the third paging message includes the first indication information and the identifier of the terminal device.
- the terminal device can receive the second paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the second paging message; if the terminal device is in the cell of the first access network device In the cell, the terminal device may receive the third paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the third paging message.
- This embodiment will be described by taking the terminal device in the cell of the second access network device as an example.
- the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message.
- the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message, or the first access network device may also send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first paging message.
- the indication information is sent to the second access network device, and then the second access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
- the following describes some possible implementations of the first indication information.
- the first indication information may correspond to the first SDT process.
- the first indication information may indicate that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC in the first SDT process configuration.
- the first SDT process may be pre-agreed by the protocol, for example, the first SDT process is the first SDT process after the terminal device receives the first indication information, and the first SDT process may be the MO-SDT process or the MT-SDT process, There is no specific limit.
- the first indication information may correspond to the first area.
- the first indication information may indicate that when the terminal device is located in the first area and in an inactive state, use a default RLC configuration.
- the first area may be pre-agreed in the agreement; or, the first access network device may send first information to the terminal device, and the first information is used to determine the first area, or in other words, the first information is used to configure the first area.
- an area For example, if the first area includes one or more cells, the first information may be cell list information, and the cell list information includes identifiers of one or more cells.
- the first indication information may include the first information; or, the first indication information may not include the first information.
- the manner in which the first access network device sends the first information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first information.
- the manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the first information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
- the first region may include the RNA of the terminal device, or the first region may be the RNA of the terminal device.
- the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities.
- the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the M RLC layer entities use a default RLC configuration.
- M is a positive integer.
- the M RLC layer entities may be pre-agreed in the protocol.
- the first access network device may send the second information to the terminal device, where the second information is used to determine the M RLC layer entities.
- the first indication information may include the second information; or, the first indication information may not include the second information, in this case, the manner in which the first access network device sends the second information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first
- the manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the second information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
- the second information may include identifiers of one or more radio bearers, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the one or more radio bearers.
- the one or more radio bearers may include a first radio bearer, and the first radio bearer may be a DRB or an SRB.
- the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer is RLC layer entity 1
- the transmission mode used by RLC layer entity 1 is AM
- RLC layer entity 1 can use the uplink AM default
- the RLC configuration performs the first processing on the PDCP PDU received from the PDCP layer to obtain the RLC PDU, and uses the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU received from the MAC layer to obtain the PDCP PDU.
- the second information may further include reconfiguration information, and the reconfiguration information is used to reconfigure the transmission modes used by the M RLC layer entities.
- the first indication information includes the second information
- the first indication information may include a correspondence between a radio bearer identifier and an RLC configuration, as shown in Table 1.
- Table 1 Example of content included in the first indication information
- the terminal device receives the information shown in Table 1
- the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB1 can use the AM default RLC configuration (specifically, the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB1 can use the uplink AM default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU to obtain the RLC PDU, And use the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU)
- the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB2 can use the UM default RLC configuration (specifically, the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB2 can use the uplink UM default RLC configuration to support PDCP
- the PDU performs the first processing to obtain the RLC PDU, and uses the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the R
- the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer can follow the previous transmission mode and use the default RLC corresponding to the previous transmission mode. configuration.
- the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer may use the default RLC configuration corresponding to the reconfigured transmission mode.
- the second information may indicate one or more transmission modes
- the M RLC layer entities may be RLC layer entities using the one or more transmission modes.
- the one or more transmission modes include the first transmission mode, assuming that the first transmission mode is AM, and the RLC layer entities using AM include RLC layer entity 2, then the RLC layer entity 2 can use the AM default RLC configuration .
- the first indication information corresponds to the first transmission direction.
- the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used in the first transmission direction.
- the first transmission direction may be pre-agreed in the protocol.
- the first access network device may send third information to the terminal device, where the third information is used to determine the first transmission direction.
- the first indication information may include the third information; or, the first indication information does not include the third information, in this case, the manner in which the first access network device sends the third information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first
- the manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the third information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
- the first transmission direction may be an uplink transmission direction, or the first transmission direction may also be a downlink transmission direction, or the first transmission direction includes an uplink transmission direction and a downlink transmission direction.
- the implementations in (1) to (4) above may exist independently, or at least two implementations in (1) to (4) may coexist.
- the first indication information may correspond to the first area, the first SDT process, M RLC layer entities, and the first transmission direction.
- the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state
- the M RLC layer entities use the default RLC configuration in the first transmission direction.
- the first indication information corresponds to the first area, the first SDT process, M RLC layer entities, and the first transmission direction, wherein the first area includes the cell of the second access network device
- the first SDT process is the first SDT process after the terminal device receives the first indication information
- the M RLC layer entities are all RLC layer entities involved in the first SDT process
- the first transmission direction includes the uplink transmission direction and the downlink transmission direction
- the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU1 containing the RRC recovery request message to obtain RLC PDU1, and then sends RLC PDU1 to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network device The network device receives RLC PDU1.
- the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information.
- the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state, the default RLC configuration is used. With this condition, the default RLC configuration can be used to perform first processing on PDCP PDU1 to obtain RLC PDU1, and then send RLC PDU1 to the second access network device.
- the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information and other possible information. For example, the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information and the capability information of the second access network device. Specifically, if the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on PDCP PDU1 according to the first indication information to obtain RLC PDU1, and then send the RLC PDU1 to the second access network device.
- the terminal device uses a dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU1 to obtain RLC PDU1, and then sends RLC PDU1 to the second access network device.
- the capability information of the second access network device may include 1 bit. When the value of this bit is “1”, it means that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. When the value of this bit is "0", ", it means that the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration.
- the terminal device may obtain the capability information of the second access network device. For example, after the terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, it may receive a system message sent by the second access network device, The system message includes capability information of the second access network device.
- “capability information” in the embodiment of the present application may be replaced with “enabling information”.
- the "capability information of the second access network device” can be replaced with "enabling information of the second access network device", and the enabling information of the second access network device is used to indicate Whether to enable the default RLC configuration of the second access network device. If the default RLC configuration of the second access network device is enabled, it means that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. If the second access network device is disabled The default RLC configuration of the device indicates that the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration.
- the second access network device sends a request message to the first access network device, the request message is used to request the context information of the terminal device, and the request message may include the identifier of the terminal device, such as the I-RNTI of the terminal device; correspondingly, The first access network device receives the request message.
- the request message may also include other possible information.
- the request message may also include capability information of the second access network device.
- the request message may also include information a, and information a may be used to indicate that the reason why the second access network device requests the context information of the terminal device is that the terminal device initiates the MO-SDT process.
- the request message may further include information b, and the information b may be used to indicate that the reason why the second access network device requests the context information of the terminal device is that the terminal device initiates an MT-SDT process.
- information a and information b may also be referred to as cause values.
- the first access network device may determine whether the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration according to the identifier of the terminal device included in the request message. If the terminal device does not use the default RLC configuration, then the subsequent implementation can refer to the prior art; if the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration, it can be determined whether to perform anchor point relocation, and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration and The terminal device communicates, and sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device. For details, refer to the following scenarios 1 to 3.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the basis for the first access network device to determine whether to perform anchor relocation and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- the first access network device may determine whether to perform anchor point relocation according to the capability information of the second access network device (in this case, the request message includes the capability information of the second access network device). positioning, and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- the first access network device may determine to perform anchor relocation, and allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (see Situation 1); For another example, if the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may determine not to perform anchor relocation, and the first access network device uses the default RLC configuration and the terminal The devices communicate (see situation 2 below); for another example, if the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may also determine not to perform anchor relocation, and allow the second access network The device communicates with the end device using the default RLC configuration (see scenario three below).
- the second access network device may not consider the Capability information of the device (in this case, the request message may not include capability information of the second access network device). For example, regardless of whether the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may determine not to perform anchor relocation, and the first access network device uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (see Case 2 below).
- the first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the response message.
- the response message may include anchor relocation information 1, second indication information, and context information of the terminal device, where the context information includes a dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device.
- the anchor relocation information 1 is used to instruct to perform anchor relocation
- the second instruction information instructs the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- the content included in the second indication information may be the same as the content included in the first indication information.
- the second access network device performs operations such as path switching.
- the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
- S507-a can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
- the second access network device After receiving the RLC PDU2, the second access network device performs second processing on the RLC PDU2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain PDCP PDU2, and then parses to obtain uplink data.
- the second access network device sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
- the UPF network element sends downlink data to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device receives the downlink data.
- the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3.
- the second access network device may use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3.
- the UPF network element may also send the downlink data of the terminal device to the first access network device.
- the first access network device may indicate the , send the PDCP SDU3 containing the downlink data to the second access network device, and then, the second access network device can process the PDCP PDU3 after receiving the PDCP SDU3 containing the downlink data, and then use the default RLC configuration to configure the PDCP PDU3 Perform the first processing to obtain RLC PDU3.
- the second access network device sends RLC PDU3 to the terminal device, and the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU3, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, Then analyze and obtain the downlink data.
- the second access network device generates a second RRC release message (for example, the second access network device generates a second RRC release message when it determines that the data transmission is about to be completed), and uses the default RLC configuration pair to include the second RRC
- the PDCP PDU4 of the release message is first processed to obtain RLC PDU4, and then the RLC PDU4 is sent to the terminal device, and the RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform RLC PDU4
- the second process obtains the PDCP PDU4, and then parses to obtain the second RRC release message, and ends the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and continues to maintain the inactive state.
- the terminal device and the second access network device may always use the default RLC configuration for communication during the SDT process.
- the second access network device may send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration, and the terminal device receives After receiving the third indication information, it may be switched to use the dedicated RLC configuration.
- the third indication information may be carried in an RRC message.
- the second access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU5 containing the RRC message to obtain RLC PDU5, and send RLC PDU5 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after the terminal device receives RLC PDU5,
- the default RLC configuration can be used to perform second processing on RLC PDU5 to obtain PDCP PDU5, and the RRC message can be obtained by parsing, and then the terminal device can switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration according to the third indication information in the RRC message, and then the second access network device and End devices can continue data transmission using a dedicated RLC configuration.
- the second access network device may generate a second RRC release message, and use a dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain RLC PDU4, and then send the RLC PDU4 to the terminal device Send RLC PDU4, RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message; correspondingly, after receiving RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU4 to obtain PDCP PDU4, and then parse to obtain the second RRC release message, and End the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and keep in the inactive state.
- the terminal device sends the uplink data 1 to the second access network device, before receiving the feedback information of the uplink data 1 (the feedback information is used to indicate whether the uplink data 1 is successfully received), the third indication is received information, since the terminal device has not received the feedback information of uplink data 1, it is impossible to determine whether the uplink data 1 has been successfully received, and after the terminal device switches to using a dedicated RLC configuration, it may not be able to parse even if it receives the feedback information of uplink data 1 ( For example, the access network device uses the default RLC configuration to send the feedback information before sending the third indication information), therefore, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to retransmit the uplink data 1 .
- the third indication information may be an RRC recovery message. After receiving the RRC recovery message, the terminal device may switch to a connected state, and then the second access network device and the terminal device communicate using a dedicated RLC configuration.
- the first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device.
- the second access network device may receive the response message.
- the response message includes anchor point relocation information 2, the anchor point Relocation information 2 is used to indicate that anchor point relocation is not performed.
- the response message may not include context information of the terminal device.
- the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
- S506-b can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
- the second access network device receives the RLC PDU2, and forwards the RLC PDU2 to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the RLC PDU2, performs second processing on the RLC PDU2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain PDCP PDU2, and then parses to obtain uplink data.
- the first access network device sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
- the UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the downlink data, and uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain RLC PDU3.
- the first access network device sends an RLC PDU3 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data.
- the second access network device receives RLC PDU3, and forwards RLC PDU3 to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive RLC PDU3, and use the default configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
- the first access network device may generate a second RRC release message, and use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain RLC PDU4, and then send The second access network device sends RLC PDU4, and RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message.
- the second access network device receives the RLC PDU4, and forwards the RLC PDU4 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU4 to obtain a PDCP PDU4, and then The second RRC release message is obtained by parsing, and the data transmission in the inactive state is ended according to the second RRC release message and kept in the inactive state.
- the terminal device and the first access network device may always use the default RLC configuration for communication during the SDT process.
- the first access network device may send third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration, and the terminal device receives the first After three instructions, you can switch to using dedicated RLC configuration.
- the third indication information may be carried in an RRC message, and for details, refer to the description in the first scenario above.
- the first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the response message.
- the response message includes anchor relocation information 2 and second indication information, where the anchor relocation information 2 is used to indicate that anchor relocation is not performed, and the second indication information indicates that the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration and the terminal devices to communicate.
- the response message may also include context information of the terminal device, and the context information does not include part or all of the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device.
- the dedicated RLC configuration corresponding to the uplink transmission may not be included in the context information.
- the context information may not include dedicated RLC configurations corresponding to the M RLC layer entities.
- the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
- S506-c can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
- the second access network device After receiving the RLC PDU2, the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration to perform a second process on the RLC PDU2 to obtain a PDCP PDU2.
- the second access network device sends PDCP PDU2 to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the PDCP PDU2, parses the PDCP PDU2 to obtain uplink data, and then sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
- the UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device.
- the first access network device receives the downlink data, and sends PDCP PDU3 to the second access network device, where the PDCP PDU3 includes the downlink data.
- the second access network device receives the PDCP PDU3, uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3, and sends the RLC PDU3 to the terminal device.
- the second access network device sends an RLC PDU3 to the terminal device, where the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data.
- the terminal device can receive RLC PDU3, and use the default configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
- the first access network device may generate a second RRC release message, and send a PDCP PDU4 to the second access network device, where the PDCP PDU4 includes the second RRC release message.
- the second access network device receives the PDCP PDU4, and uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 including the second RRC release message to obtain the RLC PDU4.
- the second access network device sends RLC PDU4 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain PDCP PDU4 , and then analyze and obtain the second RRC release message, and end the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and continue to maintain the inactive state.
- the first access network device receives the PDU from the second access network device, it can know that the PDU is a PDCP PDU (ie, a PDU processed by the RLC layer).
- the PDU is a PDCP PDU (ie, a PDU processed by the RLC layer).
- PDCP PDU ie, a PDU processed by the RLC layer.
- the uplink transmission reference may be made to the uplink transmission, which will not be repeated here.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, as shown in FIG. 6 , including:
- the terminal device determines to use a default RLC configuration.
- the terminal device when the terminal device needs to initiate an SDT process (for ease of description, referred to as a second SDT process), it may be determined whether to use the default RLC configuration in the second SDT process.
- the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the capability information of the first access network device and/or the second access network device; wherein, the capability information of the first access network device is used for Indicating whether the first access network device supports the default RLC configuration, and the capability information of the second access network device is used to indicate whether the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. For example, when the first access network device and/or the second access network device support the default RLC configuration, the terminal device may determine to use the default RLC configuration, and send the first uplink information to the second access network device.
- the terminal device may obtain the capability information of the first access network device.
- the terminal device may receive a system message of the first access network device, and the system message includes the capability information of the first access network device.
- the terminal device acquires the capability information of the second access network device refer to Embodiment 1.
- the terminal device notifies the second access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
- the terminal device if the terminal device notifies the second access network device during the SDT process, it means that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration during the SDT process; otherwise, it means that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration after notifying the second access network device.
- the default RLC configuration is used in the process. That is to say, the terminal device may notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the second SDT process; wherein, the second SDT process may be the current SDT process when the terminal device notifies the second access network device , or the terminal device may also be notified of the first SDT process after the second access network device.
- the terminal device sends first notification information to the second access network device, where the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
- the terminal device may send RLC PDU5 to the second access network device.
- the RLC PDU5 includes an RRC recovery request message, and the first notification information is carried in RRC recovery request message.
- RLC PDU5 is processed using the default RLC configuration.
- the first notification information is also borne by SRB1, or the first notification information may also be borne by the MAC CE, which is not specifically limited.
- the first notification information may correspond to N RLC layer entities.
- the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the N RLC layer entities of the terminal device use the default RLC configuration.
- N is a positive integer.
- the N RLC layer entities may be pre-agreed in the protocol.
- the terminal device may send fourth information to the second access network device, where the fourth information is used to determine N RLC layer entities.
- the first notification information may include the fourth information; or, the first notification information may not include the fourth information, in this case, the method for the terminal device to send the fourth information to the second access network device may be the same as that of the terminal device
- the manner of sending the first notification information to the second access network device is the same, for example, the fourth information and the first notification information may be carried in the same message.
- the fourth information may include identifiers of one or more radio bearers, and the N RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the one or more radio bearers.
- the fourth information may indicate one or more transmission modes, and the N RLC layer entities may be RLC layer entities using the one or more transmission modes.
- the first notification information may correspond to the second transmission direction.
- the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses the default RLC in the second transmission direction. configuration.
- the second transmission direction may be pre-agreed by agreement.
- the first access network device may send fifth information to the terminal device, where the fifth information is used to determine the second transmission direction.
- the first notification information may include the fifth information; or, the first notification information does not include the fifth information, in this case, the way the first access network device sends the fifth information to the terminal device may be the same as the first
- the manner in which the access network device sends the first notification information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the fifth information and the first notification information may be carried in the same message.
- the first notification information corresponds to N RLC layer entities and the second transmission direction, wherein, the N RLC layer entities are all RLC layer entities involved in the second SDT process of the terminal device, and the first The two transmission directions include the uplink transmission direction and the downlink transmission direction" as an example for description.
- the terminal device may receive the system message sent by the second access network device.
- the system message may include a PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration and/or a preamble corresponding to the default RLC configuration, and the PRACH resource is used to bear the preamble.
- the terminal device may send the Msg1 of the four-step random access procedure to the second access network device.
- the preamble included in Msg1 is the preamble corresponding to the default RLC configuration
- the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in Msg1 may be the PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration.
- the second access network device may know that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration (for example, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the current SDT process).
- the terminal device may receive the system message sent by the second access network device.
- the system message may include at least one of the following: PRACH resources corresponding to the default RLC configuration, preambles corresponding to the default RLC configuration, and PUSCH resources corresponding to the default RLC configuration.
- the terminal device may send the MsgA of the two-step random access procedure to the second access network device.
- MsgA meets at least one of the following: the preamble included in MsgA can be the corresponding preamble of the default RLC configuration; the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in MsgA can be the PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration; The data is carried on the PUSCH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration.
- the second access network device may know that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration (for example, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the current SDT process).
- the terminal device sends RLC PDU6 to the second access network device, and the logical channel corresponding to the RLC PDU6 is the logical channel corresponding to the default RLC configuration, then the second access network device can learn that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration.
- RLC PDU6 may include an RRC recovery request message and/or uplink data.
- the logical channel corresponding to the default RLC configuration may be pre-agreed by the protocol, or may be configured by the second access network device.
- the terminal device receives the system message sent by the second access network device, and the system message includes the default RLC channel. Configure the corresponding logical channel ID.
- the terminal device notifies the second access network device in an explicit way
- the terminal device in the implementation mode 2 and implementation mode 3, notifies the second access network device in an implicit way network equipment.
- the second access network device sends a request message to the first access network device, the request message is used to request the context information of the terminal device, and the request message may include the identifier of the terminal device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the request information.
- the request message may further include second notification information, and the second notification information is used to notify the first access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
- the request message may also include other possible information, for example, the request message may also include capability information of the second access network device, and for example, the request message may also include information a or information b described in Embodiment 1.
- the second notification information may also be carried in other possible messages, which is not specifically limited.
- the terminal device can perform data transmission with the access network device in the inactive state without switching to the connected state for data transmission, thereby effectively reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and signaling overhead.
- the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and the access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, such as the coverage of the terminal device from the first access network device After the area moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and the access network device (such as the first access network device or the second access network device) can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, thereby reducing the first Signaling overhead between the access network device and the second access network device (for example, in the above scenario 2 or 3, the first access network device does not need to send the RLC configuration required by SDT to the second access network device) , improving the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
- the access network device (such as the first access network device and the second access network device) is described as a whole, as can be seen from the previous description of the access network device,
- the access network device may also include separate nodes, as shown in FIG. 2B , for example.
- the first access network device may include CU-1 and DU-1.
- the first indication information can be determined by CU-1, or the first indication can also be determined by DU-1 information.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, the method includes the following steps:
- the CU-1 determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used.
- CU-1 sends first indication information to DU-1; correspondingly, DU-1 may receive the first indication information.
- CU-1 sends an F1 interface message to DU-1, and the F1 interface message includes first indication information.
- CU-1 stores the context information of the terminal device, and CU-1 may also send the context information of the terminal device to DU-1, and the context information does not include some or all dedicated RLC configurations of the terminal device.
- the dedicated RLC configuration corresponding to the uplink transmission may not be included in the context information.
- the context information may not include dedicated RLC configurations corresponding to the M RLC layer entities.
- the DU may store the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, and in this case, the CU-1 may not need to send the context information to the DU-1.
- the CU-1 sends the first indication information to the DU-1, so that the subsequent DU-1 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2
- DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU3 to obtain RLC PDU3 can also be obtained by DU-1 using the default RLC configuration to first process PDCP PDU4 to obtain RLC PDU4.
- the CU-1 sends the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
- the CU-1 may send the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
- the CU-1 sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU-1, the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information.
- CU-1 receives the downlink data of the terminal device (the terminal device is in an inactive state) from the core network device, and needs to send the downlink data to the terminal device, then CU-1 can serve as the terminal device Configure the paging end-device within the RNA. For example, CU-1 sends a first paging message to the second access network device, the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first 1. Instructions.
- the second access network device may send a second paging message in the cell of the second access network device, the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device.
- the paging message includes first indication information and an identifier of the terminal device.
- CU-1 may also send a third paging message through DU-1, the third paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the third paging message includes the first indication information and the identifier of the terminal device.
- the terminal device can receive the second paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the second paging message; if the terminal device is in the cell of DU-1, Then the terminal device may receive the third paging message, and acquire the first indication information from the third paging message.
- S702 is an optional step.
- S703 may be executed first, and then after CU-1 receives the request message from the second access network device , if it is determined that DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (for example, refer to situation 2 in Embodiment 1), the first indication information may be sent to DU-1; if it is determined that DU-1 does not need to use the default RLC It is configured to communicate with the terminal device (for example, refer to situation 1 or situation 3 in Embodiment 1), then the first indication information may not be sent to DU-1.
- CU-1 may send the first indication information to DU-1 without considering whether subsequent DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- the first access network device includes CU-1 and DU-1.
- CU-1 determines the first indication information, it can send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message, or through the second A paging message sends the first indication information to the second access network device, so that the first indication information can be quickly sent to the terminal device or the second access network device.
- the terminal device and the DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT (such as the above scenario three), and the CU-1 does not need to send the second access network device Send the RLC configuration required by the SDT to improve the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
- FIG. 8 is another schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the method includes the following steps:
- the DU-1 determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used.
- CU-1 can send a request message to DU-1, and the request message is used to request whether to allow the terminal device to use the default RLC configuration; correspondingly, after receiving the request message, DU-1 can determine whether to allow the terminal device to use the default RLC configuration.
- the RLC configuration if allowed, may determine the first indication information.
- CU-1 may send a request message to DU-1 after determining that it is necessary to send the first RRC release message (for instructing the terminal device to enter the inactive state) to the terminal device and allowing the terminal device to initiate the SDT process.
- CU-1 may send a request message to DU-1 after receiving the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element and allowing the terminal device to initiate the SDT process.
- DU-1 sends first indication information to CU-1.
- DU-1 may send an F1 interface message to CU-1, where the F1 interface message includes the first indication information.
- the CU-1 sends the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
- the CU-1 may receive the second notification information from the second access network device.
- FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the method includes the following steps:
- the CU-1 receives second notification information from the second access network device, where the second notification information is used to notify that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
- CU-1 sends second notification information to DU-1.
- CU-1 sends an F1 interface message to DU-1, and the F1 interface message includes the second notification information.
- the CU-1 sends the second notification information to the DU-1, so that the subsequent DU-1 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2
- DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU3 to obtain RLC PDU3 can also be obtained by DU-1 using the default RLC configuration to first process PDCP PDU4 to obtain RLC PDU4.
- the above S902 is an optional step.
- CU-1 receives the second notification information from the second access network device, if it is determined that DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration and terminal device To communicate (for example, see situation two in the first embodiment), you can send the second notification information to DU-1; if it is determined that DU-1 does not need to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (for example, see the second notification in the first embodiment) Situation 1 or Situation 3), the second notification information may not be sent to DU-1.
- CU-1 receives the second notification information from the second access network device, it can send the second notification information to DU-1 without considering whether the subsequent DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device .
- the second access network device may include CU-2 and DU-2.
- the CU-2 may receive the second indication information from the first access network device.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the method includes the following steps:
- the CU-2 receives second indication information from the first access network device.
- CU-2 sends second indication information to DU-2.
- CU-2 sends an F1 interface message to DU-2, and the F1 interface message includes the second indication information.
- the CU-2 sends the second indication information to the DU-2, so that the subsequent DU-2 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- DU-2 can use the default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2, and DU-2 can use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on PDCP PDU3.
- the RLC PDU3 is obtained by processing, and the PDCP PDU4 can also be processed first by the DU-2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain the RLC PDU4.
- the terminal device can communicate with the access network device in the inactive state. Data transmission without switching to the connected state for data transmission, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of the terminal device.
- the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and DU can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT.
- the terminal device moves from the coverage area of the first access network device to After the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and DU (such as the DU of the first access network device or the DU of the second access network device) can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, so as to facilitate the reduction of the first access network
- the signaling overhead between the network device and the second access network device (for example, in the above-mentioned scenario 2 or 3, the CU of the first access network device does not need to send the RLC configuration required by SDT to the second access network device) , improving the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
- step numbers of the various flowcharts described in Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4 are only an example of the execution process, and do not constitute a restriction on the order of execution of the steps. There is no timing dependence between each other in the embodiments of the present application There is no strict order of execution among the steps of a relationship. Not all the steps illustrated in each flow chart are necessary steps, and some steps may be deleted on the basis of each flow chart according to actual needs, or other possible steps may be added on the basis of each flow chart according to actual needs.
- Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4 can be referred to each other; in addition, in the same embodiment , different implementations or different examples can also refer to each other.
- the access network device or the terminal device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing various functions.
- the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
- the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional units of the access network device or the terminal device according to the above method example, for example, each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one unit .
- the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
- FIG. 11 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of the device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
- an apparatus 1100 may include: a processing unit 1102 and a communication unit 1103 .
- the processing unit 1102 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 1100 .
- the communication unit 1103 is used to support the communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
- the communication unit 1103 is also referred to as a transceiver unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, configured to perform receiving and sending operations respectively.
- the device 1100 may further include a storage unit 1101 for storing program codes and/or data of the device 1100 .
- the apparatus 1100 may be the first access network device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip set in the first access network device.
- the processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the first access network device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ).
- the processing unit 1102 mainly executes internal actions of the first access network device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, 5B, 5C or 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
- the processing unit 1102 is configured to: determine first indication information, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use a default radio link control RLC configuration; the communication unit 1103 is configured to : Sending the first indication information to the terminal device, or sending the first indication information to a second access network device, where the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- the apparatus 1100 may be the second access network device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the second access network device.
- the processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the second access network device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ).
- the processing unit 1102 mainly executes internal actions of the second access network device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, 5B, 5C or 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
- the communication unit 1103 is configured to: receive second instruction information from the first access network device, the second instruction information instructing the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device
- the processing unit 1102 is configured to: use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device according to the second indication information.
- the apparatus 1100 may be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal device.
- the processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the terminal device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ).
- the processing unit 1102 mainly executes the internal actions of the terminal device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, 5C or FIG. 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
- the communication unit 1103 is configured to: receive first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, the first indication information indicating that when the terminal device is inactive state, using the default RLC configuration; the processing unit 1102 is configured to: according to the first indication information, when the terminal device is in the inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; wherein, the first access The network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- each unit in the device can be implemented in the form of software called by the processing element; they can also be implemented in the form of hardware; some units can also be implemented in the form of software called by the processing element, and some units can be implemented in the form of hardware.
- each unit can be a separate processing element, or it can be integrated in a certain chip of the device.
- it can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which is called and executed by a certain processing element of the device. Function.
- all or part of these units can be integrated together, or implemented independently.
- the processing element mentioned here may also be a processor, which may be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities.
- each operation of the above method or each unit above may be realized by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element, or implemented in the form of software called by the processing element.
- the units in any of the above devices may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, for example: one or more specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or, one or Multiple microprocessors (digital signal processor, DSP), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (field programmable gate array, FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- DSP digital signal processor
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- the units in the device can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
- the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or other processors that can call programs.
- CPU central processing unit
- these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
- the above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices.
- the receiving unit is an interface circuit for the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
- the above sending unit is an interface circuit of the device, and is used to send signals to other devices.
- the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
- the access network device 120 may include one or more DUs 1201 and one or more CUs 1202.
- the DU 1201 may include at least one antenna 12011, at least one radio frequency unit 12012, at least one processor 12013 and at least one memory 12014.
- the DU 1201 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals, conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing.
- the CU 1202 may include at least one processor 12022 and at least one memory 12021 .
- the CU 1202 part is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling access network equipment, and the like.
- the DU 1201 and the CU 1202 may be physically set together, or physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
- the CU 1202 is the control center of the access network equipment, and can also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function.
- the CU 1202 may be used to control the access network device to execute the operation procedures related to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the access network device 120 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs.
- the DU may include at least one processor 12013 and at least one memory 12014
- the radio frequency unit may include at least one antenna 12011 and at least one radio frequency unit 12012
- the CU may include at least one processor 12022 and at least one memory 12021.
- the CU1202 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can separately support wireless access networks of different access standards.
- Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
- the memory 12021 and processor 12022 may serve one or more boards. That is to say, memory and processors can be set independently on each single board. It may also be that multiple single boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be set on each single board.
- the DU1201 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can separately support wireless access networks of different access standards (such as a 5G network). LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
- the memory 12014 and processor 12013 may serve one or more boards. That is to say, memory and processors can be set independently on each single board. It may also be that multiple single boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be set on each single board.
- the access network device shown in FIG. 12 can implement various processes related to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the access network device shown in FIG. 12 are respectively for realizing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the terminal device includes: an antenna 1310 , a radio frequency part 1320 , and a signal processing part 1330 .
- the antenna 1310 is connected to the radio frequency part 1320 .
- the radio frequency part 1320 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 1310, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 1330 for processing.
- the signal processing part 1330 processes the information of the terminal device and sends it to the radio frequency part 1320
- the radio frequency part 1320 processes the information of the terminal device and sends it to the network device through the antenna 1310 .
- the signal processing part 1330 may include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to realize the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it may also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to realize the processing of the operating system and the application layer of the terminal equipment; in addition, it may also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystems, peripheral subsystems, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices.
- the modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
- the modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 1331, including, for example, a master CPU and other integrated circuits.
- the modem subsystem may further include a storage element 1332 and an interface circuit 1333 .
- the storage element 1332 is used to store data and programs, but the program used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above methods may not be stored in the storage element 1332, but stored in a memory outside the modem subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded and used.
- Interface circuit 1333 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
- the modem subsystem can be realized by a chip, and the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any method performed by the terminal device above, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices.
- the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler.
- the device for the terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the storage element may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing element, that is, an on-chip storage element.
- the program for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the above method may be stored in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element.
- the processing element invokes or loads a program from the off-chip storage element on the on-chip storage element, so as to invoke and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the unit of the terminal device that implements each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are set on the modem subsystem, where the processing elements may be integrated circuits, For example: one or more ASICs, or one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form a chip.
- the units of the terminal device for implementing each step in the above method can be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method.
- the chip may integrate at least one processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the stored program of the storage element to realize the method executed by the above terminal device; or, the chip may integrate at least one integrated circuit for realizing the above terminal
- the method executed by the device; or, the above implementation manners may be combined, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of calling programs by processing elements, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
- the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments.
- the processing element can perform some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: that is, by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element combined with instructions Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in a manner; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first method and the second method.
- the processing elements here are the same as those described above, and may be implemented by a processor, and the functions of the processing elements may be the same as those of the processing unit described in FIG. 11 .
- the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, and may also be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors DSP , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
- the storage element can be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element can be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 11 .
- a storage element may be one memory, or a general term for multiple memories.
- the terminal device shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes related to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the terminal device shown in FIG. 13 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
- system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
- “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
- “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship.
- “At least one of the following” or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example "at least one of A, B and C” includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numerals such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
- the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
- computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
- These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a specific manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
- the device realizes the function specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
The present application relates to the field of communications, and discloses a communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a first access network device determines first indication information, and sends the first indication information to a terminal device, the first indication information indicating that a default RLC configuration is used when the terminal device is in an inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device can perform data transmission by using the default RLC configuration in the inactive state according to the first indication information, and does not need to be converted to a connected state and then perform data transmission, so that the power consumption and the signaling overhead of the terminal device can be effectively reduced. Furthermore, by introducing the default RLC configuration, after the terminal device moves to a coverage area of a second access network device, the terminal device and the second access network device can use the default RLC configuration for data transmission, so that the second access network device does not need to obtain a dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device from the first access network device, thereby effectively saving the overhead of transmission resources.
Description
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2021年12月07日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111486593.3、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application with application number 202111486593.3 and application title "A Communication Method and Device" filed with the China Patent Office on December 07, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated in this application by reference.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
在第五代(the 5th generation,5G)通信***中,终端设备存在三种无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)状态,分别为RRC连接(RRC-connected)态、RRC空闲(RRC-idle)态和RRC非激活(RRC-inactive)态。In the fifth generation (the 5th generation, 5G) communication system, there are three radio resource control (RRC) states for terminal equipment, which are RRC connected (RRC-connected) state and RRC idle (RRC-idle) state. state and RRC inactive (RRC-inactive) state.
其中,连接态的终端设备可以和接入网设备进行数据传输,而非激活态(或空闲态)的终端设备想要与接入网设备进行数据传输时,需要先完成多次信息交互以转换到连接态。采用该种方式,由于非激活态的终端设备需要转换到连接态再与接入网设备进行数据传输,对于很小且不频繁传输的数据包来说,会导致不必要的功耗和信令开销。Among them, the terminal device in the connected state can perform data transmission with the access network device, and when the terminal device in the inactive state (or idle state) wants to perform data transmission with the access network device, it needs to complete multiple information interactions to convert to the connected state. Using this method, since the terminal equipment in the inactive state needs to switch to the connected state and then transmit data with the access network equipment, it will cause unnecessary power consumption and signaling for small and infrequently transmitted data packets. overhead.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置,用于实现终端设备在非激活态下进行数据传输,从而降低终端设备的功耗和信令开销。The present application provides a communication method and device, which are used to implement data transmission of a terminal device in an inactive state, thereby reducing power consumption and signaling overhead of the terminal device.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第一接入网设备或者第一接入网设备中的芯片,以该方法应用于第一接入网设备为例,在该方法中,第一接入网设备确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认无线链路控制RLC配置;以及,向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,或者,向第二接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the first access network device or a chip in the first access network device, taking the application of the method to the first access network device as an example, In this method, the first access network device determines first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default radio link control RLC configuration is used; and, sending to the terminal device The first indication information, or, sending the first indication information to a second access network device, where the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
采用上述方案,在终端设备接收到第一指示信息后,可以根据第一指示信息,在非激活态下使用默认RLC配置进行数据传输,无需转换到连接态再进行数据传输,从而能够有效降低终端设备的功耗和信令开销。此外,本申请实施例通过在接入网设备侧和终端设备侧引入默认RLC配置,使得终端设备与接入网设备可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT;比如终端设备从第一接入网设备的覆盖区域移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,终端设备与第二接入网设备可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT,从而使得第一接入网设备可以不向第二接入网设备发送终端设备进行SDT所需要的RLC配置,降低第一接入网设备与第二接入网设备之间的信令开销,提高资源利用率;同时,由于省去了第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送RLC配置的过程,从而可以提高终端设备在非激活态下的数据传输效率。With the above solution, after the terminal device receives the first indication information, it can use the default RLC configuration for data transmission in the inactive state according to the first indication information, without switching to the connected state for data transmission, which can effectively reduce the number of terminals. Power consumption and signaling overhead of the device. In addition, the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and the access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT; for example, the coverage of the terminal device from the first access network device After the area moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and the second access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, so that the first access network device does not need to send the terminal to the second access network device The device performs the RLC configuration required by SDT, which reduces the signaling overhead between the first access network device and the second access network device, and improves resource utilization; The process of sending the RLC configuration by the access network device, so as to improve the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,包括:向所述终端设备发送第一无线资源控制RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, sending the first indication information to the terminal device includes: sending a first radio resource control RRC release message to the terminal device, where the first RRC release message is used to indicate the The terminal device enters an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,向第二接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息,包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, sending the first indication information to the second access network device includes: sending a first paging message to the second access network device, where the first paging message is used to instructing the second access network device to page the terminal device, where the first paging message includes the first indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息对应第一区域,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备位于第一区域且处于非激活态时,使用所述默认RLC配置;其中,所述第一区域包括所述终端设备的RNA。In a possible design, the first indication information corresponds to the first area, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; wherein , the first region includes RNA of the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一区域包括一个或多个小区,所述第一指示信息包括所述一个或多个小区的标识。In a possible design, the first area includes one or more cells, and the first indication information includes identities of the one or more cells.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息对应M个RLC层实体,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,所述M个RLC层实体使用所述默认RLC配置,M为正整数。In a possible design, the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the M RLC layer entities use the default RLC configuration, M is a positive integer.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息包括第一无线承载的标识,所述M个RLC层实体为所述第一无线承载对应的RLC层实体。In a possible design, the first indication information includes an identifier of a first radio bearer, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the first radio bearer.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息包括至少一种RLC模式,所述M个RLC层实体为使用所述至少一种RLC模式的RLC层实体。In a possible design, the first indication information includes at least one RLC mode, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities using the at least one RLC mode.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示信息对应传输方向,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,在所述传输方向上使用所述默认RLC配置。In a possible design, the first indication information corresponds to a transmission direction, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration in the transmission direction.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第二接入网设备支持所述默认RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving capability information from the second access network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送第一RLC协议数据单元PDU,所述第一RLC PDU是所述第一接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;其中,所述第一RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending a first RLC protocol data unit PDU to the second access network device, where the first RLC PDU is used by the first access network device obtained through default RLC configuration processing; wherein, the first RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to indicate that the terminal device ends in the inactive data transmission in the active state and continue to remain in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二RLC PDU,所述第二RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据;使用所述默认RLC配置对所述第二RLC PDU进行处理得到第一PDCP PDU。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving a second RLC PDU from the second access network device, the second RLC PDU including uplink data of the terminal device; using the default RLC Configuring to process the second RLC PDU to obtain the first PDCP PDU.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending third indication information to the second access network device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using the stored RLC configuration included in the context information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending second indication information to the second access network device, the second indication information instructing the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration communicate with the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二PDCP PDU,所述第二PDCP PDU是所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;其中,所述第二PDCP PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving a second PDCP PDU from the second access network device, where the second PDCP PDU is the second access network device using the default RLC obtained through configuration processing; wherein, the second PDCP PDU includes uplink data of the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送锚点重定位信息和所述终端设备的上下文信息,所述锚点重定位信息用于指示不执行锚点重定位,所述上下文信息不包括所述终端设备的部分或全部RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending anchor relocation information and context information of the terminal device to the second access network device, where the anchor relocation information is used to indicate not to execute Anchor point relocation, the context information does not include part or all of the RLC configuration of the terminal device.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于第二接入网设备或者 第二接入网设备中的芯片,以该方法应用于第二接入网设备为例,在该方法中,第二接入网设备接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信;以及,根据所述第二指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信;其中,所述第一接入网设备为最后服务所述终端设备的接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the second access network device or a chip in the second access network device, taking the application of the method to the second access network device as an example, In this method, the second access network device receives second instruction information from the first access network device, where the second instruction information instructs the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device; And, according to the second instruction information, use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device; wherein, the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the first Two access network devices are located on the RNA of the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,使用所述默认RLC配置;根据所述第一寻呼消息,发送第二寻呼消息,所述第二寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第二寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, receiving a first paging message from the first access network device, where the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device, The first paging message includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the default RLC configuration is used; according to the first paging message, sending a second A paging message, where the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述终端设备发送第三RLC PDU,所述第三RLC PDU是所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;其中,所述第三RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending a third RLC PDU to the terminal device, where the third RLC PDU is obtained through processing by the second access network device using the default RLC configuration; Wherein, the third RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue remain in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述终端设备的第四RLC PDU,所述第四RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据或RRC恢复请求消息;使用所述默认RLC配置对所述第四RLC PDU进行处理得到第三PDCP PDU。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving a fourth RLC PDU from the terminal device, the fourth RLC PDU including the uplink data of the terminal device or an RRC recovery request message; using the default The RLC configuration processes the fourth RLC PDU to obtain a third PDCP PDU.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: sending third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using the stored context information of the terminal device. RLC configuration included.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第二锚点重定位信息和终端设备的第二上下文信息,所述第二锚点重定位信息用于指示不执行锚点重定位,所述第二上下文信息不包括所述终端设备的部分或全部RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving second anchor relocation information from the first access network device and second context information of the terminal device, the second anchor relocation information It is used to indicate that anchor point relocation is not performed, and the second context information does not include part or all of the RLC configuration of the terminal device.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于终端设备或者终端设备中的芯片,以该方法应用于终端设备为例,在该方法中,终端设备接收来自第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;根据所述第一指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第一接入网设备和/或所述第二接入网设备进行通信;其中,所述第一接入网设备为最后服务所述终端设备的接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。In the third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a terminal device or a chip in a terminal device. Taking the method applied to a terminal device as an example, in this method, the terminal device receives The first instruction information of the network access device or the second access network device, the first instruction information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; according to the first instruction information, use the The default RLC configuration communicates with the first access network device and/or the second access network device; wherein the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, so The second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述接收来自第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,包括:接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二寻呼消息,所述第二寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第二寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。In a possible design, the receiving the first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device includes: receiving a first RRC release message from the first access network device, The first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, receiving a second request from the second access network device A paging message, the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,在所述终端设备移动至所述第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第二接入网设备支持所述默认RLC配置。In a possible design, after the terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the method further includes: receiving capability information from the second access network device, the The capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
在一种可能的设计中,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第二接入网设备进行通信,包括:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第五RLC PDU,所述第五RLC PDU是所述第一接入网设备或所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;其中,所述第五RLC PDU 包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。In a possible design, using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes: receiving a fifth RLC PDU from the second access network device, the fifth RLC PDU It is obtained by the first access network device or the second access network device using the default RLC configuration processing; wherein the fifth RLC PDU includes the downlink data of the terminal device or the second RRC release message , the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue to maintain in the inactive state.
在一种可能的设计中,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第二接入网设备进行通信,包括:向所述第二接入网设备发送第六RLC PDU,所述第六RLC PDU是使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的,所述第六RLC PDU包括RRC恢复请求消息或上行数据。In a possible design, using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes: sending a sixth RLC PDU to the second access network device, and the sixth RLC PDU is Obtained by using the default RLC configuration processing, the sixth RLC PDU includes an RRC recovery request message or uplink data.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:接收来自所述第一接入网设备或所述第二接入网设备的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。In a possible design, the method further includes: receiving third indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, the third indication information indicating that the terminal device Switch to use the RLC configuration included in the stored context information of the terminal device.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于CU或者CU中的芯片,以该方法应用于CU为例。在该方法中,CU确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;以及,CU发送所述第一指示信息。在一种可能的设计中,CU发送所述第一指示信息,包括:CU通过DU向所述终端设备发送第一RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,CU向第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼处于非激活态的所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,CU通过DU发送第三寻呼消息,所述第三寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第三寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,CU向所述DU发送所述第一指示信息。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be applied to a CU or a chip in the CU. Take the application of the method to the CU as an example. In this method, the CU determines first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and, the CU sends the first indication information. In a possible design, the CU sending the first indication information includes: the CU sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU, and the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the In an active state, the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message is used to indicate that the second access network device The network access device pages the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a third paging message through the DU, and the third paging message uses For paging the terminal device, the third paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends the first indication information to the DU.
或者,CU接收来自DU的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;以及,CU发送所述第一指示信息。在一种可能的设计中,CU发送所述第一指示信息,包括:CU通过DU向所述终端设备发送第一RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,CU向第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼处于非激活态的所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,CU通过DU发送第三寻呼消息,所述第三寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第三寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向DU发送请求消息,所述请求消息用于确定所述第一指示信息。Alternatively, the CU receives first indication information from the DU, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and the CU sends the first indication information. In a possible design, the CU sending the first indication information includes: the CU sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU, and the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the In an active state, the first RRC release message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message is used to indicate that the second access network device The network access device pages the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first indication information; or, the CU sends a third paging message through the DU, and the third paging message uses For paging the terminal device, the third paging message includes the first indication information. In a possible design, the method further includes: sending a request message to the DU, where the request message is used to determine the first indication information.
或者,CU接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示使用所述默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信;以及,CU向DU发送所述第二指示信息。Alternatively, the CU receives second indication information from the first access network device, the second indication information indicating that the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device; and the CU sends the second indication information to the DU.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以应用于DU或者DU中的芯片,以该方法应用于DU为例。在该方法中,DU接收来自CU的第一RRC释放消息或者第三寻呼消息,第一RRC释放消息或者第三寻呼消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第三寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备;以及,DU向终端设备发送所述第一RRC释放消息或者第三寻呼消息。在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:DU接收来自所述CU的所述第一指示信息。In the fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method can be applied to a DU or a chip in the DU, taking the application of the method to the DU as an example. In this method, the DU receives a first RRC release message or a third paging message from a CU, and the first RRC release message or the third paging message includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in In the inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the inactive state, and the third paging message is used to page the terminal device; and, the DU sends the terminal device The device sends the first RRC release message or the third paging message. In a possible design, the method further includes: a DU receiving the first indication information from the CU.
或者,DU确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;以及,DU向CU发送所述第一指示信息。在一种可能的设计中,DU确定第一指示信息,包括:DU接收来自CU的请求消息;以及,根据所述请求消息,确定所述第一指示信息。Alternatively, the DU determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used; and, the DU sends the first indication information to the CU. In a possible design, the determining of the first indication information by the DU includes: the DU receives a request message from the CU; and, according to the request message, determines the first indication information.
或者,DU接收来自CU的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示使用所述默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信;以及,根据所述第二指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信。Or, the DU receives second indication information from the CU, where the second indication information indicates that the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device; and, according to the second indication information, the default RLC configuration is used to communicate with the terminal device. End devices communicate.
第六方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以为第一接入网设备或者设置在第一接入网设备中的芯片。所述通信装置具备实现上述第一方面的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括执行上述第一方面涉及操作所对应的模块或单元或手段(means),所述模块或单元或手段可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a first access network device or a chip set in the first access network device. The communication device has the function of realizing the first aspect above, for example, the communication device includes modules or units or means corresponding to the operations involved in the first aspect above, and the modules, units or means can be realized by software , or be realized by hardware, and may also be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理单元、通信单元,其中,通信单元可以用于收发信号,以实现该通信装置和其它装置之间的通信;处理单元可以用于执行该通信装置的一些内部操作。处理单元、通信单元执行的功能可以和上述第一方面涉及的操作相对应。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices; the processing unit can be used to perform the communication Some internal operations of the device. The functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the first aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,处理器可以用于与存储器耦合。所述存储器可以保存实现上述第一方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第一方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory. The memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions referred to in the first aspect above. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the first aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,存储器可以保存实现上述第一方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第一方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the above first aspect. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the first aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和接口电路,其中,处理器用于通过所述接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第一方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any possible design or implementation in the first aspect above. method.
第七方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以为第二接入网设备或者设置在第二接入网设备中的芯片。所述通信装置具备实现上述第二方面的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括执行上述第二方面涉及操作所对应的模块或单元或手段,所述模块或单元或手段可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a second access network device or a chip set in the second access network device. The communication device has the function of realizing the second aspect above, for example, the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the operations involved in the second aspect above, and the module, unit or means can be implemented by software, or by Hardware implementation, and corresponding software implementation may also be executed by hardware.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理单元、通信单元,其中,通信单元可以用于收发信号,以实现该通信装置和其它装置之间的通信;处理单元可以用于执行该通信装置的一些内部操作。处理单元、通信单元执行的功能可以和上述第二方面涉及的操作相对应。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices; the processing unit can be used to perform the communication Some internal operations of the device. The functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the second aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,处理器可以用于与存储器耦合。所述存储器可以保存实现上述第二方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第二方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory. The memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions referred to in the second aspect above. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device implements the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the second aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,存储器可以保存实现上述第二方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第二方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the second aspect above. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device implements the method in any possible design or implementation manner in the second aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和接口电路,其中,处理器用于通过所述接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第二方面中任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方 法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any possible design or implementation of the second aspect above. method.
第八方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置可以为终端设备或者设置在终端设备中的芯片。所述通信装置具备实现上述第三方面涉及的功能,比如,所述通信装置包括执行上述第三方面涉及操作所对应的模块或单元或手段,所述功能或单元或手段可以通过软件实现,或者通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device may be a terminal device or a chip disposed in the terminal device. The communication device is equipped with the functions involved in the third aspect above, for example, the communication device includes a module or unit or means corresponding to the operations involved in the third aspect above, and the function, unit or means can be implemented by software, or It can be realized by hardware, and corresponding software can also be realized by executing hardware.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理单元、通信单元,其中,通信单元可以用于收发信号,以实现该通信装置和其它装置之间的通信,比如,通信单元用于向终端设备发送***信息;处理单元可以用于执行该通信装置的一些内部操作。处理单元、通信单元执行的功能可以和上述第三方面涉及的操作相对应。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processing unit and a communication unit, wherein the communication unit can be used to send and receive signals to realize communication between the communication device and other devices, for example, the communication unit is used to send The device sends system information; the processing unit can be used to perform some internal operations of the communication device. The functions performed by the processing unit and the communication unit may correspond to the operations involved in the third aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器,处理器可以用于与存储器耦合。所述存储器可以保存实现上述第三方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor, and the processor can be used to be coupled with the memory. The memory may store necessary computer programs or instructions to realize the functions mentioned in the above third aspect. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner of the third aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,存储器可以保存实现上述第三方面涉及的功能的必要计算机程序或指令。所述处理器可执行所述存储器存储的计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被执行时,使得所述通信装置实现上述第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and a memory, and the memory can store necessary computer programs or instructions for realizing the functions mentioned in the above third aspect. The processor may execute the computer program or instruction stored in the memory, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the communication device may implement the method in any possible design or implementation manner of the third aspect above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置包括处理器和接口电路,其中,处理器用于通过所述接口电路与其它装置通信,并执行上述第三方面任意可能的设计或实现方式中的方法。In a possible design, the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is used to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the method in any possible design or implementation of the third aspect above .
可以理解地,上述第六方面至第八方面中,处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现。此外,以上处理器可以为一个或多个,存储器可以为一个或多个。存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,或者存储器与处理器分离设置。在具体实现过程中,存储器可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。It can be understood that, in the above sixth to eighth aspects, the processor can be implemented by hardware or by software. When implemented by hardware, the processor can be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software When implemented, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is realized by reading software codes stored in the memory. In addition, there may be one or more processors, and one or more memories. The memory can be integrated with the processor, or the memory can be separated from the processor. In a specific implementation process, the memory and the processor can be integrated on the same chip, or they can be respectively arranged on different chips. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the arrangement of the memory and the processor.
第九方面,本申请提供一种通信***,该通信***可以包括上述第六方面所提供的通信装置、上述第七方面所提供的通信装置和上述第八方面所提供的通信装置。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a communication system, which may include the communication device provided in the sixth aspect above, the communication device provided in the seventh aspect above, and the communication device provided in the eighth aspect above.
第十方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机可读指令,当计算机读取并执行所述计算机可读指令时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第五方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer-readable instructions are stored in the computer-readable medium, and when a computer reads and executes the computer-readable instructions, the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible design of the fifth aspect.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,当计算机读取并执行所述计算机程序产品时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第五方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a computer program product. When a computer reads and executes the computer program product, the computer executes the method in any possible design of the first aspect to the fifth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的软件程序,以实现上述第一方面至第五方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, and is used to read and execute a software program stored in the memory, so as to realize the first to the first aspects above Any one of five possible design approaches.
本申请的这些方面或其它方面在以下实施例的描述中会更加简明易懂。These or other aspects of the present application will be more concise and understandable in the description of the following embodiments.
图1为本申请实施例适用的通信***的架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例提供的终端设备与网络设备之间的协议层结构示例图;FIG. 2A is an example diagram of a protocol layer structure between a terminal device and a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的一种CU-DU分离架构的示意图;FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a CU-DU separation architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例提供的又一种CU-DU分离架构的示意图;FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram of another CU-DU separation architecture provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图3A为本申请实施例提供的终端设备通过四步随机接入过程进行SDT的一种可能的流程示意图;FIG. 3A is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a four-step random access process provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3B为本申请实施例提供的终端设备通过两步随机接入过程进行SDT的一种可能的流程示意图;FIG. 3B is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a two-step random access process provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的终端设备在非激活态下进行数据传输的一种流程示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic flow diagram of a terminal device performing data transmission in an inactive state provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5A、图5B、图5C为本申请实施例一提供的通信方法所对应的一些流程示意图;FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5C are schematic flowcharts corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例二提供的通信方法所对应的流程示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的又一种流程示意图;FIG. 8 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的又一种流程示意图;FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application;
图10本申请实施例四提供的通信方法所对应的流程示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的可能的示例性框图;Fig. 11 is a possible exemplary block diagram of the device involved in the embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
图1为本申请实施例适用的通信***的架构示意图。如图1所示,通信***1000包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)100和核心网(core network,CN)200,可选地,通信***1000还可以包括数据网(data network,DN)300。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the communication system 1000 includes a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) 100 and a core network (core network, CN) 200, optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include a data network (data network, DN) )300.
下面分别对图1中所涉及的RAN100、CN100、DN300进行详细说明。The RAN100, CN100, and DN300 involved in FIG. 1 will be described in detail below.
一、RAN1001. RAN100
RAN100可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备(也可称为接入网设备,如图1中的110a和110b),还可以包括至少一个终端设备(如图1中的120a-120j),终端设备可以通过无线的方式与无线接入网设备相连。终端设备和终端设备之间以及接入网设备和接入网设备之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。The RAN100 may include at least one radio access network device (also referred to as an access network device, such as 110a and 110b in Figure 1), and may also include at least one terminal device (such as 120a-120j in Figure 1), the terminal device It can be connected with wireless access network equipment in a wireless manner. The terminal device and the terminal device and the access network device and the access network device may be connected to each other in a wired or wireless manner.
(1)终端设备、接入网设备(1) Terminal equipment, access network equipment
终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端设备可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。A terminal device may also be called a terminal, a user equipment (user equipment, UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, and the like. Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (internet of things, IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
接入网设备可以是基站、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、5G通信***中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB, gNB)、第六代(6th generation,6G)通信***中的下一代基站、未来通信***中的基站或WiFi***中的接入节点等;也可以是完成基站功能的模块或单元。接入网设备可以是宏基站(如图1中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图1中的110b),还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。本申请的实施例对接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。The access network equipment can be a base station, an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), a next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB) in a 5G communication system, a sixth generation (6th generation generation, 6G) next-generation base station in the communication system, base station in the future communication system or access node in the WiFi system, etc.; it can also be a module or unit that completes the function of the base station. The access network device may be a macro base station (such as 110a in Figure 1), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in Figure 1), or a relay node or a donor node. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form adopted by the access network equipment.
需要说明的是:接入网设备和终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。接入网设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对接入网设备和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。此外,接入网设备和终端设备的角色可以是相对的,例如,图1中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动接入网设备,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端设备120j来说,120i是接入网设备;但对于第一接入网设备10a来说,120i是终端设备,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过接入网设备与接入网设备之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是接入网设备。因此,接入网设备和终端设备都可以统一称为通信装置,图1中的110a和110b可以称为具有接入网设备功能的通信装置,图1中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端设备功能的通信装置。It should be noted that: the access network equipment and the terminal equipment may be fixed or mobile. Access network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and artificial satellites in the air. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of the access network device and the terminal device. In addition, the roles of access network equipment and terminal equipment can be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 1 can be configured as a mobile access network equipment. For the terminal device 120j of the first access network device 120j, 120i is an access network device; but for the first access network device 10a, 120i is a terminal device, that is, communication between 110a and 120i is performed through a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, communication between 110a and 120i may also be performed through an interface protocol between access network devices. At this time, compared to 110a, 120i is also an access network device. Therefore, both the access network equipment and the terminal equipment can be collectively referred to as communication devices, 110a and 110b in FIG. 1 can be referred to as communication devices with access network equipment functions, and 120a-120j in FIG. functional communication device.
在本申请实施例中,接入网设备的功能也可以由接入网设备中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有接入网设备功能的控制子***来执行。这里的包含有接入网设备功能的控制子***可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端的功能也可以由终端中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端功能的装置来执行。In the embodiment of the present application, the functions of the access network equipment may also be performed by modules (such as chips) in the access network equipment, or may be performed by a control subsystem including the functions of the access network equipment. Here, the control subsystem including the functions of the access network equipment may be the control center in the above application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart city. The functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or may be performed by a device including the terminal function.
(2)协议层结构(2) Protocol layer structure
接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构,例如控制面协议层结构可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层(physical layer,PHY);用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层,在一种可能的实现中,PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。其中,SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层也可以统称为接入层。有关上述各个协议层的具体描述,可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)的相关技术规范。The communication between the access network device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure. For example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) ) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer (physical layer, PHY); the user plane protocol layer structure may include PDCP layer, RLC layer , a MAC layer, and a physical layer. In a possible implementation, a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer may also be included above the PDCP layer. Wherein, the SDAP layer, the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the physical layer may also be collectively referred to as an access layer. For specific descriptions of the above protocol layers, reference may be made to relevant technical specifications of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP).
当接入网设备和终端设备进行用户面数据传输时,数据需要经过用户面协议层,比如经过SDAP层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层。示例性地,接入网设备和终端设备之间通过建立至少一个数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)来传输数据,每个DRB可以对应一组功能实体集合,比如该功能实体集合可以包括一个PDCP层实体、该PDCP层实体对应的至少一个RLC层实体、至少一个RLC层实体对应的至少一个MAC层实体以及至少一个MAC层实体对应的至少一个物理层实体。When the access network device and the terminal device transmit user plane data, the data needs to pass through the user plane protocol layer, such as the SDAP layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer. Exemplarily, at least one data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB) is established between the access network device and the terminal device to transmit data, and each DRB may correspond to a group of functional entity sets, for example, the functional entity set may include a A PDCP layer entity, at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, at least one MAC layer entity corresponding to the at least one RLC layer entity, and at least one physical layer entity corresponding to the at least one MAC layer entity.
以下行数据传输为例,图2A示意出了下行数据在各层间传输。如图2A所示,从接入网设备的角度来看,接入网设备的SDAP层实体取得数据后,可以根据数据的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)流标识(QoS flow indicator,QFI)将数据映射到相应DRB的PDCP层实体,PDCP层实体可以将数据传送到该PDCP层实体对应的至少一个RLC层实 体,进而由至少一个RLC层实体传输到对应的MAC层实体,再由MAC层实体生成传输块,然后通过对应的物理层实体进行无线传输,以发送给终端设备。Downlink data transmission is taken as an example, and FIG. 2A schematically shows that downlink data is transmitted between layers. As shown in Figure 2A, from the perspective of the access network device, after the SDAP layer entity of the access network device obtains the data, it can identify (QoS flow indicator, QFI) according to the quality of service (quality of service, QoS) of the data. The data is mapped to the PDCP layer entity of the corresponding DRB, and the PDCP layer entity can transmit the data to at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, and then at least one RLC layer entity is transmitted to the corresponding MAC layer entity, and then the MAC layer The entity generates a transmission block, and then wirelessly transmits it through the corresponding physical layer entity, so as to send it to the terminal device.
其中,下行数据可以在接入网设备的各个层中进行相对应的封装,某一层从该层的上层收到的数据视为该层的服务数据单元(service data unit,SDU),经过层封装后成为协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU),再传递给下一个层。例如PDCP层实体从SDAP层接收到的数据可以称为PDCP SDU,PDCP层实体对PDCP SDU进行封装后,得到PDCP PDU并发送到RLC层;RLC层实体从PDCP层接收到的PDCP PDU可以称为RLC SDU,RLC层实体对RLC SDU进行封装后,得到RLC PDU并发送到MAC层。其中,不同层之间可以通过相应的通道来传输数据,比如RLC层实体与MAC层实体之间可以通过逻辑信道(logical channel,LCH)来传输数据,MAC层实体与物理层实体之间可以通过传输信道(transport channel)来传输数据。Among them, the downlink data can be correspondingly encapsulated in each layer of the access network equipment, and the data received by a certain layer from the upper layer of the layer is regarded as the service data unit (service data unit, SDU) of the layer, and passed through the layer After encapsulation, it becomes a protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU), and then passed to the next layer. For example, the data received by the PDCP layer entity from the SDAP layer can be called PDCP SDU. After the PDCP layer entity encapsulates the PDCP SDU, the PDCP PDU is obtained and sent to the RLC layer; the PDCP PDU received by the RLC layer entity from the PDCP layer can be called RLC SDU, after the RLC layer entity encapsulates the RLC SDU, obtains the RLC PDU and sends it to the MAC layer. Among them, data can be transmitted between different layers through corresponding channels, for example, data can be transmitted between RLC layer entities and MAC layer entities through a logical channel (logical channel, LCH), and between MAC layer entities and physical layer entities can be transmitted through Transport channel (transport channel) to transmit data.
当接入网设备和终端设备进行控制面信令传输时,信令需要经过控制面协议层,比如经过RRC层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层。示例性地,接入网设备和终端设备之间通过建立至少一个信令无线承载(signalling radio bearer,SRB)来传输信令。其中,SRB和DRB可以统称为无线承载(radio bearer,RB)。When the access network device and the terminal device transmit control plane signaling, the signaling needs to pass through the control plane protocol layer, such as the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and physical layer. Exemplarily, at least one signaling radio bearer (signalling radio bearer, SRB) is established between the access network device and the terminal device to transmit signaling. Wherein, the SRB and the DRB may be collectively referred to as a radio bearer (radio bearer, RB).
以接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC信令为例,其中,RRC信令也可以称为RRC消息。图2A示意出了RRC消息在各层间传输的示意图。如图2A所示,从接入网设备的角度来看,接入网设备的RRC层实体生成RRC消息后,可以将RRC消息递交给相应SRB的PDCP层实体,PDCP层实体可以将RRC消息传送到该PDCP层实体对应的至少一个RLC层实体,进而由至少一个RLC层实体传输到对应的MAC层实体,再由MAC层实体生成传输块,然后通过对应的物理层实体进行无线传输,以发送给终端设备。Taking the RRC signaling sent by the access network device to the terminal device as an example, the RRC signaling may also be called an RRC message. FIG. 2A shows a schematic diagram of RRC message transmission between layers. As shown in Figure 2A, from the perspective of the access network device, after the RRC layer entity of the access network device generates the RRC message, it can submit the RRC message to the PDCP layer entity of the corresponding SRB, and the PDCP layer entity can transmit the RRC message to to at least one RLC layer entity corresponding to the PDCP layer entity, and then transmitted by at least one RLC layer entity to the corresponding MAC layer entity, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transmission block, and then performs wireless transmission through the corresponding physical layer entity to send to the terminal device.
从终端设备的角度来看,终端设备的物理层接收到来自接入网设备的传输块后,可以从物理层依次往上层递交,在各个层中可以进行相对应的解封装。也就是说,终端设备中的各个层所执行的处理可以为接入网设备中的各个层所执行的处理的逆过程。From the perspective of the terminal device, after the physical layer of the terminal device receives the transmission block from the access network device, it can submit it to the upper layer sequentially from the physical layer, and corresponding decapsulation can be performed in each layer. That is to say, the processing performed by each layer in the terminal device may be a reverse process of the processing performed by each layer in the access network device.
(3)CU-DU分离架构(3) CU-DU separation architecture
5G通信***中,接入网设备可以包括一个或多个集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和一个或多个分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制,该种架构可以称为CU-DU分离架构。作为示例,CU和DU之间的接口可以称为F1接口,其中,控制面(control panel,CP)接口可以为F1-C,用户面(user panel,UP)接口可以为F1-U。In the 5G communication system, the access network equipment may include one or more centralized units (centralized unit, CU) and one or more distributed units (distributed unit, DU), and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU. Such an architecture may be referred to as a CU-DU separation architecture. As an example, the interface between the CU and the DU may be called an F1 interface, where a control plane (control panel, CP) interface may be F1-C, and a user plane (user panel, UP) interface may be F1-U.
CU和DU的处理功能可以根据无线网络的协议层划分:比如图2B所示,PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP层以下协议层(例如RLC层和MAC层等)的功能设置在DU。可以理解的是,上述对CU和DU的处理功能按照协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,也可以按照其他的方式进行划分,比如RLC层以上协议层的功能设置在CU,RLC层及以下协议层的功能设置在DU,又比如可以将CU或者DU划分为具有更多协议层的功能,又比如CU或DU还可以划分为具有协议层的部分处理功能。本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。The processing functions of CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network: for example, as shown in Figure 2B, the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (such as RLC layer and MAC layer, etc.) are set at DU. It can be understood that the above-mentioned division of the processing functions of CU and DU according to the protocol layer is only an example, and it can also be divided according to other methods. For example, the functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are set in the CU, the RLC layer and the following protocols The function of the layer is set in the DU. For example, the CU or DU can be divided into functions with more protocol layers. For example, the CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with the protocol layer. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
进一步地,CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现,或者也可以由不同的实体来实现。例如,可以对CU的功能进行进一步切分,即将控制面和用户面分离并通过不同实体来实现,分别为控制面CU实体(即CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(即CU-UP实体),CU-CP 实体和CU-UP实体可以与DU相耦合,共同完成RAN设备的功能。CU-CP实体与CU-UP实体之间的接口可以为E1接口,CU-CP实体与DU之间的接口可以为F1-C接口,CU-UP实体与DU之间的接口可以为F1-U接口。其中,一个DU和一个CU-UP可以连接到一个CU-CP。在同一个CU-CP控制下,一个DU可以连接到多个CU-UP,一个CU-UP可以连接到多个DU。图2C为一种空口协议栈分布示意图。如图2C所示,针对用户面和控制面来说,空口协议栈都可以是RLC、MAC、PHY在DU,PDCP及以上协议层在CU。Further, the function of the CU may be implemented by one entity, or may also be implemented by different entities. For example, the functions of the CU can be further divided, that is, the control plane and the user plane are separated and realized by different entities, which are the control plane CU entity (ie, the CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (ie, the CU-UP entity). ), the CU-CP entity and the CU-UP entity can be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the RAN device. The interface between CU-CP entity and CU-UP entity can be E1 interface, the interface between CU-CP entity and DU can be F1-C interface, and the interface between CU-UP entity and DU can be F1-U interface. Among them, one DU and one CU-UP can be connected to one CU-CP. Under the control of the same CU-CP, one DU can be connected to multiple CU-UPs, and one CU-UP can be connected to multiple DUs. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram of the distribution of an air interface protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 2C , for both the user plane and the control plane, the air interface protocol stack can be RLC, MAC, and PHY in the DU, and PDCP and above protocol layers in the CU.
在上述图2B和图2C所示意的架构中,CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备,或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装后透传给终端设备或CU。以下实施例中如果涉及这种信令在DU和终端设备之间的传输,此时,DU对信令的发送或接收包括这种场景。例如,RRC或PDCP层的信令最终会处理为物理层的数据发送给终端设备,或者,由接收到的物理层的数据转变而来。在这种架构下,该RRC或PDCP层的信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和射频装置发送的。In the architecture shown in FIG. 2B and FIG. 2C above, the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU. The DU can directly encapsulate the signaling through the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU without parsing the signaling. In the following embodiments, if the signaling is transmitted between the DU and the terminal device, at this time, the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario. For example, signaling at the RRC or PDCP layer will eventually be processed as data at the physical layer and sent to the terminal device, or converted from received data at the physical layer. Under this architecture, the signaling at the RRC or PDCP layer can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or sent by the DU and the radio frequency device.
二、CN2. CN
CN200中可以包括多个核心网网元,无线接入网设备可以通过无线或有线方式与核心网网元连接。核心网网元与无线接入网设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是将核心网网元的功能与无线接入网设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上,还可以是一个物理设备上集成了部分核心网网元的功能和部分的无线接入网设备的功能。CN200 may include multiple core network elements, and wireless access network equipment may be connected to the core network elements in a wireless or wired manner. The core network element and the radio access network device can be independent and different physical devices, or the functions of the core network element and the logical functions of the radio access network device can be integrated on the same physical device, or they can be a The physical device integrates some functions of core network elements and some functions of radio access network devices.
以5G通信***为例,CN200中的核心网网元可以包括会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、应用功能(application function,AF)网元等。有关上述各个核心网网元的具体描述,可以参考3GPP的相关技术规范。Taking the 5G communication system as an example, the core network elements in CN200 can include session management function (session management function, SMF) network elements, user plane function (user plane function, UPF) network elements, policy control function (policy control function, PCF) network elements, application function (application function, AF) network elements, etc. For specific descriptions of the above core network elements, reference may be made to relevant technical specifications of the 3GPP.
三、DN3003. DN300
DN300也可以称为分组数据网络(packet data network,PDN),是位于运营商网络之外的网络。DN300中可部署有多种业务对应的应用服务器,为终端设备提供多种可能的服务。The DN300 may also be called a packet data network (packet data network, PDN), which is a network outside the operator's network. Application servers corresponding to various services can be deployed in DN300 to provide various possible services for terminal equipment.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例中的方案可以适用于多种可能的通信***中,比如5G通信***或者未来的6G通信***中。上述网元或者功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行软件功能,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。此外,图1只是示意图,该通信***的RAN中还可以包括其它接入网设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备。It can be understood that the solutions in the embodiments of the present application may be applicable to various possible communication systems, such as a 5G communication system or a future 6G communication system. The foregoing network element or function may be a network element in a hardware device, or a software function running on dedicated hardware, or a virtualization function instantiated on a platform (for example, a cloud platform). In addition, FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and the RAN of the communication system may also include other access network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices.
基于图1所示意的网络架构,下面对本申请实施例所涉及的相关技术特征进行解释说明。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了让本申请实施例更容易被理解,而不应该视为对本申请所要求的保护范围的限定。Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , the relevant technical features involved in the embodiment of the present application are explained below. It should be noted that these explanations are for the purpose of making the embodiments of the present application easier to understand, and should not be regarded as limiting the scope of protection required by the present application.
一、非激活态1. Inactive state
终端设备的状态可以包括RRC空闲态、RRC非激活和RRC连接态。其中,RRC空闲态可简称为空闲态,RRC非激活态可简称为非激活态,也可以称为第三态,RRC连接态可简称为连接态。The state of the terminal device may include RRC idle state, RRC inactive state and RRC connected state. Wherein, the RRC idle state may be referred to as the idle state for short, the RRC inactive state may be referred to as the inactive state for short, and may also be called the third state, and the RRC connected state may be referred to as the connected state for short.
接入网设备的覆盖区域可以包括为一个或多个小区。示例性地,终端设备接入第一接 入网设备的小区a1进入连接态后,第一接入网设备可指示终端设备从连接态切换为非激活态。比如,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送RRC释放消息,RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备进入非激活态;相应地,终端设备接收到RRC释放消息后,可以进入非激活态。非激活态的终端设备与第一接入网设备之间断开了RRC连接,但第一接入网设备中仍存储终端设备的上下文信息,此种情形下,第一接入网设备也可以称为终端设备最后连接的接入网设备,又或者说最后服务终端设备的接入网设备。The coverage area of the access network device may include one or more cells. Exemplarily, after the terminal device accesses the cell a1 of the first access network device and enters the connected state, the first access network device may instruct the terminal device to switch from the connected state to the inactive state. For example, the first access network device may send an RRC release message to the terminal device, and the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter the inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device may enter the inactive state after receiving the RRC release message. The RRC connection between the inactive terminal device and the first access network device is disconnected, but the context information of the terminal device is still stored in the first access network device. In this case, the first access network device can also be called It is the access network device that the terminal device is connected to last, or the access network device that finally serves the terminal device.
二、基于RAN的通知区域和RAN寻呼区域2. RAN-based notification area and RAN paging area
(1)基于RAN的通知区域(RAN-based notification area,RNA)(1) RAN-based notification area (RAN-based notification area, RNA)
第一接入网设备可以为终端设备配置RNA,并向终端设备发送RNA配置信息。比如,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送的RRC释放消息可以包括RNA配置信息。RNA可以包括一个或多个小区,RNA配置信息包括以下至少一项:1)一个或多个小区的标识,其中,多个小区可以属于一个接入网设备或多个接入网设备,比如RNA包括第一接入网设备的小区a1和第二接入网设备的小区b1,则RNA配置信息可以包括小区a1和小区b1的标识;2)至少一个RAN跟踪区域码(RAN tracking area code),一个RAN跟踪区域可以包括一个或多个小区,当一个RAN跟踪区域以包括多个小区时,这多个小区可以属于一个接入网设备或多个接入网设备。The first access network device may configure RNA for the terminal device, and send RNA configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the RRC release message sent by the first access network device to the terminal device may include RNA configuration information. The RNA may include one or more cells, and the RNA configuration information includes at least one of the following: 1) The identity of one or more cells, where multiple cells may belong to one access network device or multiple access network devices, such as RNA Including the cell a1 of the first access network device and the cell b1 of the second access network device, the RNA configuration information may include the identification of the cell a1 and the cell b1; 2) at least one RAN tracking area code (RAN tracking area code), A RAN tracking area may include one or more cells. When a RAN tracking area includes multiple cells, the multiple cells may belong to one access network device or multiple access network devices.
当终端设备在RNA内移动时,不需要进行RNA更新;当终端设备的RNA定时器超时或者终端设备移动出了RNA时,终端设备需要发起接入网通知区域更新(RAN-based notification area update,RANU)流程。When the terminal device moves within the RNA, there is no need for RNA update; when the RNA timer of the terminal device times out or the terminal device moves out of the RNA, the terminal device needs to initiate an access network notification area update (RAN-based notification area update, RANU) process.
在终端设备进入非激活态后,当核心网设备接收到终端设备的下行数据后,会直接把下行数据发给终端设备最后连接的第一接入网设备。由于第一接入网设备不能确定终端设备是否在其覆盖范围内,因此,在寻呼终端设备时,第一接入网设备可以根据为终端设备配置的RNA,在RNA(比如第一接入网设备的小区a1和第二接入网设备的小区b1)内进行寻呼。具体来说,第一接入网设备可以在小区a1内发送寻呼消息,以及通过Xn接口向小区b1对应的第二接入网设备发送RAN寻呼(XnAP RAN Paging)消息。After the terminal device enters the inactive state, when the core network device receives the downlink data from the terminal device, it will directly send the downlink data to the first access network device to which the terminal device was last connected. Since the first access network device cannot determine whether the terminal device is within its coverage, when paging the terminal device, the first access network device may, according to the RNA configured for the terminal device, Paging is performed in the cell a1 of the network device and the cell b1) of the second access network device. Specifically, the first access network device may send a paging message in the cell a1, and send a RAN paging (XnAP RAN Paging) message to the second access network device corresponding to the cell b1 through the Xn interface.
(2)RAN寻呼区域(2) RAN paging area
沿用上述示例,第一接入网设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RAN寻呼消息;相应地,第二接入网设备接收到RAN寻呼消息后,可以根据RAN寻呼消息确定RAN寻呼区域,进而在RAN寻呼区域内寻呼终端设备。其中,第二接入网设备确定的RAN寻呼区域可以包括一个或多个小区,该一个或多个小区为第二接入网设备的小区,且该一个或多个小区属于终端设备的RNA。Using the above example, the first access network device may send a RAN paging message to the second access network device; correspondingly, after receiving the RAN paging message, the second access network device may determine the RAN paging message according to the RAN paging message. paging area, and then paging terminal equipment in the RAN paging area. Wherein, the RAN paging area determined by the second access network device may include one or more cells, the one or more cells are the cells of the second access network device, and the one or more cells belong to the RNA of the terminal device .
示例性地,当终端设备的RNA内包括多个接入网设备的小区时,多个接入网设备中的每个接入网设备均可在各自的RAN寻呼区域内寻呼终端设备。Exemplarily, when the RNA of the terminal device includes cells of multiple access network devices, each of the multiple access network devices can page the terminal device in its respective RAN paging area.
三、RAN寻呼消息和寻呼消息3. RAN paging message and paging message
(1)RAN寻呼消息(1) RAN paging message
RAN寻呼消息可以用于通知接入网设备寻呼终端设备,RAN寻呼消息可以包括终端设备的标识。示例性地,以第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送的RAN寻呼消息为例,该RAN寻呼消息还可以包括RAN寻呼区域信息,进而第二接入网设备可以根据RAN寻呼区域信息确定RAN寻呼区域。The RAN paging message may be used to notify the access network device to page the terminal device, and the RAN paging message may include the identifier of the terminal device. Exemplarily, taking the RAN paging message sent by the first access network device to the second access network device as an example, the RAN paging message may also include RAN paging area information, and then the second access network device may The RAN paging area information determines the RAN paging area.
(2)寻呼消息(2) Paging message
寻呼消息可以用于寻呼终端设备,寻呼消息可以包括寻呼记录列表(PagingRecordlist),寻呼记录列表中包括需要寻呼的一个或多个终端设备的标识。非激活态的终端设备接收到寻呼消息后,若确定寻呼记录列表中包括该终端设备的标识,则可以向接入网设备发起随机接入过程;若确定寻呼记录列表中不包括该终端设备的标识,则可以继续在下一个寻呼周期接收寻呼消息。The paging message may be used for paging the terminal device, and the paging message may include a paging record list (PagingRecordlist), and the paging record list includes the identifiers of one or more terminal devices that need to be paged. After receiving the paging message, the inactive terminal device can initiate a random access process to the access network device if it is determined that the terminal device's identifier is included in the paging record list; if it is determined that the paging record list does not include the If the identification of the terminal equipment is not used, the paging message can continue to be received in the next paging cycle.
四、SDT4. SDT
如背景技术所述,终端设备处于非激活态时,如果想要进行数据传输,则需要恢复RRC连接转换到连接态后才能进行数据传输。然而,在某些场景下,非激活态的终端设备所需要传输的数据包通常很小(即小数据(small data,SD)),如果终端设备每次进行数据传输都发生RRC连接建立过程,以从非激活态转换到连接态,则会导致不必要的功耗和信令开销。为了降低终端设备的功耗,一种可能的解决方式为,终端设备在非激活态下进行数据传输,比如终端设备可以在非激活态下向接入网设备发送小数据和/或接收接入网设备发送的小数据,即小数据传输(small data transmission,SDT)。As described in the background technology, when the terminal device is in the inactive state, if it wants to perform data transmission, it needs to restore the RRC connection and switch to the connected state before data transmission can be performed. However, in some scenarios, the data packets required to be transmitted by an inactive terminal device are usually very small (that is, small data (SD)), and if the RRC connection establishment process occurs every time the terminal device performs data transmission, To transition from an inactive state to a connected state, unnecessary power consumption and signaling overhead are incurred. In order to reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment, one possible solution is that the terminal equipment transmits data in an inactive state. For example, the terminal equipment can send small data to the access network equipment and/or receive access The small data sent by the network equipment, that is, small data transmission (SDT).
其中,SDT的场景可以有多种,具体可以涵盖智能手机相关业务,比如应用程序(application,APP)的心跳包或推送消息;以及非智能手机的相关业务,比如可穿戴设备的周期性数据(例如心跳包)、工业无线传感器网络所发送的周期性数据等等。此外,本申请实施例中对小数据的具体大小可以不做限定,比如100~300字节的数据包可以认为是小数据。Among them, there are many scenarios for SDT, which can specifically cover smartphone-related services, such as application (APP) heartbeat packets or push messages; and non-smartphone-related services, such as periodic data of wearable devices ( Such as heartbeat packets), periodic data sent by industrial wireless sensor networks, etc. In addition, the specific size of the small data may not be limited in the embodiment of the present application, for example, a data packet of 100-300 bytes may be considered as small data.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例下文中所描述的数据传输可以是指SDT,本申请实施例所描述的上行数据和下行数据均可以为小数据。It can be understood that the data transmission described in the following embodiments of the present application may refer to SDT, and the uplink data and downlink data described in the embodiments of the present application may both be small data.
五、SDT过程5. SDT process
终端设备可以通过随机接入过程来进行SDT,比如终端设备在随机接入过程中,向接入网设备(第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备)发送上行数据和/或接收下行数据。随机接入过程可以包括四步随机接入过程和两步随机接入过程。终端设备可以通过四步随机接入过程中的消息3发送上行数据,和/或通过消息4接收下行数据;或者,终端设备也可以通过两步随机接入过程中的消息A发送上行数据,和/或通过消息B接收下行数据。The terminal device can perform SDT through the random access process. For example, the terminal device sends uplink data to the access network device (the first access network device or the second access network device) and/or receives the downlink data during the random access process. data. The random access procedure may include a four-step random access procedure and a two-step random access procedure. The terminal device can send uplink data through message 3 in the four-step random access process, and/or receive downlink data through message 4; or, the terminal device can also send uplink data through message A in the two-step random access process, and /or receive downlink data through message B.
图3A为终端设备通过四步随机接入过程进行SDT的一种可能的流程示意图。如图3A所示,包括:Fig. 3A is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a four-step random access process. As shown in Figure 3A, including:
S300-a,接入网设备通过***消息发送配置信息,配置信息用于配置SDT对应的物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)资源和/或SDT对应的前导码,PRACH资源用于承载前导码。相应地,终端设备可以接收来自接入网设备的配置信息。S300-a, the access network device sends configuration information through a system message, the configuration information is used to configure physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH) resources corresponding to the SDT and/or the preamble corresponding to the SDT, and the PRACH resources are used for Bearer preamble. Correspondingly, the terminal device can receive configuration information from the access network device.
S301-a,终端设备向接入网设备发送随机接入请求消息,随机接入请求消息可以包括前导码;相应地,接入网设备接收来自终端设备的随机接入请求消息。随机接入请求消息可以称为四步随机接入过程的第1消息或消息1(Msg1)。S301-a, the terminal device sends a random access request message to the access network device, where the random access request message may include a preamble; correspondingly, the access network device receives the random access request message from the terminal device. The random access request message may be called the first message or message 1 (Msg1) of the four-step random access procedure.
此处,Msg1所包括的前导码可以为SDT对应的前导码,和/或,承载Msg1所包括的前导码的PRACH资源可以为SDT对应的PRACH资源。Here, the preamble included in Msg1 may be a preamble corresponding to SDT, and/or, the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in Msg1 may be a PRACH resource corresponding to SDT.
S302-a,接入网设备根据随机接入请求消息,向终端设备发送随机接入响应(random access response,RAR)消息;相应地,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的随机接入响应消息。随机接入响应消息可以称为四步随机接入过程的第2消息或消息2(Msg2)。S302-a, the access network device sends a random access response (random access response, RAR) message to the terminal device according to the random access request message; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the random access response message from the access network device. The random access response message may be called the second message or message 2 (Msg2) of the four-step random access procedure.
S303-a,终端设备根据随机接入响应消息,向接入设备发送上行消息;相应地,接入 网设备接收来自终端设备的上行消息。该上行消息可以称为四步随机接入过程的第3消息或消息3(Msg3)。S303-a, the terminal device sends an uplink message to the access device according to the random access response message; correspondingly, the access network device receives the uplink message from the terminal device. The uplink message may be called the third message or message 3 (Msg3) of the four-step random access procedure.
示例性地,该上行消息可以包括RRC恢复请求消息,可选地,还可以包括上行数据。Exemplarily, the uplink message may include an RRC recovery request message, and optionally, may also include uplink data.
S304-a,接入网设备根据Msg3,向终端设备发送下行消息;相应地,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的下行消息。该下行消息可以称为四步随机接入过程的第4消息或消息4(Msg4)。S304-a, the access network device sends a downlink message to the terminal device according to Msg3; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the downlink message from the access network device. The downlink message may be called the fourth message or message 4 (Msg4) of the four-step random access procedure.
示例性地,该下行消息可以包括下行数据。Exemplarily, the downlink message may include downlink data.
上述301-a至304-a即为一种四步随机接入过程,终端设备和接入网设备可以在该四步随机接入过程中进行数据传输,比如在S303-a中,终端设备可以向接入网设备发送上行数据,在S304-a中,接入网设备可以向终端设备发送下行数据。示例性地,在执行完四步随机接入过程后,终端设备和接入网设备还可以继续进行数据传输,比如接入网设备可以通过动态调度的方式来调度终端设备发送上行数据,又比如终端设备可以基于配置授权(configured grant,CG)资源发送上行数据。The above 301-a to 304-a are a four-step random access process, and the terminal device and the access network device can perform data transmission during the four-step random access process. For example, in S303-a, the terminal device can Send uplink data to the access network device. In S304-a, the access network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Exemplarily, after performing the four-step random access process, the terminal device and the access network device can continue to perform data transmission, for example, the access network device can schedule the terminal device to send uplink data through dynamic scheduling, and for example The terminal device may send uplink data based on configured grant (configured grant, CG) resources.
可选地,当接入网设备确定SDT即将完成时,可以执行步骤305-a。其中,接入网设备确定SDT即将完成的具体实现可以有多种,比如接入网设备可以根据终端设备上报的缓存状态报告(buffer status report,BSR),确定SDT是否即将完成。Optionally, when the access network device determines that the SDT is about to be completed, step 305-a may be performed. Among them, the access network device may determine that the SDT is about to be completed. For example, the access network device may determine whether the SDT is about to be completed according to a buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR) reported by the terminal device.
S305-a,接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC释放消息,RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备结束SDT并继续保持在非激活态;相应地,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的RRC释放消息,并根据RRC释放消息,结束SDT并继续保持在非激活态。或者,接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC恢复消息,RRC恢复消息用于指示终端设备结束SDT,并转换到连接态;相应地,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的RRC恢复消息,并根据RRC恢复消息转换到连接态。S305-a, the access network device sends an RRC release message to the terminal device, and the RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and remain in an inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC release message from the access network device, And release the message according to the RRC, end the SDT and keep in the inactive state. Alternatively, the access network device sends an RRC recovery message to the terminal device, and the RRC recovery message is used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and switch to the connected state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC recovery message from the access network device, and according to the RRC Recovery message transitions to connected state.
可以理解的是,如果通过S303-a和S304-a能够完成SDT,则接入网设备也可以通过Msg4向终端设备发送RRC释放消息或者RRC恢复消息(即将S305-a合并到S304-a)。It can be understood that if the SDT can be completed through S303-a and S304-a, the access network device may also send an RRC release message or an RRC recovery message to the terminal device through Msg4 (that is, merge S305-a into S304-a).
示例性地,上述S301-a至S305-a可以称为一次SDT过程。Exemplarily, the above S301-a to S305-a may be referred to as an SDT process.
图3B为终端设备通过两步随机接入过程进行SDT的一种可能的流程示意图。如图3B所示,包括:FIG. 3B is a schematic flow diagram of a possible SDT performed by a terminal device through a two-step random access process. As shown in Figure 3B, including:
S300-b,接入网设备通过***消息发送配置信息,配置信息可以用于配置SDT对应的PRACH资源和/或SDT对应的前导码,以及还可以用于配置物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)资源。相应地,终端设备可以接收来自接入网设备的配置信息。S300-b. The access network device sends configuration information through a system message. The configuration information can be used to configure the PRACH resource corresponding to the SDT and/or the preamble corresponding to the SDT, and can also be used to configure a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel) , PUSCH) resources. Correspondingly, the terminal device can receive configuration information from the access network device.
S301-b,终端设备向接入网设备发送随机接入请求消息;相应地,接入网设备接收来自终端设备的随机接入请求消息。该随机接入请求消息可以称为两步随机接入过程的消息A(MsgA)。S301-b. The terminal device sends a random access request message to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the random access request message from the terminal device. The random access request message may be referred to as message A (MsgA) of the two-step random access procedure.
示例性地,MsgA可以包括前导码和RRC恢复请求消息,还可以包括上行数据(上行数据可以承载于S300-b中的配置信息所配置的PUSCH资源)。Exemplarily, MsgA may include a preamble and an RRC recovery request message, and may also include uplink data (the uplink data may be carried in the PUSCH resource configured by the configuration information in S300-b).
S302-b,接入网设备根据MsgA,向终端设备发送下行消息,相应地,终端设备接收来自接入网设备的下行消息。该下行消息可以称为两步随机接入过程的消息B(MsgB),MsgB是MsgA的响应消息。S302-b. The access network device sends a downlink message to the terminal device according to the MsgA, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the downlink message from the access network device. The downlink message may be called message B (MsgB) of the two-step random access procedure, and MsgB is a response message of MsgA.
示例性地,MsgB可以包括下行数据。Exemplarily, MsgB may include downlink data.
上述301-b至302-b即为两步随机接入过程,其中,终端设备和接入网设备可以在该两步随机接入过程中进行数据传输。在执行完两步随机接入过程后,终端设备和接入网设备还可以继续进行数据传输(即SDT)。当接入网设备确定SDT即将完成时,可以执行步骤303-b,S303-b的具体实现和S305-a相同。The above 301-b to 302-b are the two-step random access process, wherein the terminal device and the access network device can perform data transmission during the two-step random access process. After performing the two-step random access process, the terminal device and the access network device can continue to perform data transmission (that is, SDT). When the access network device determines that the SDT is about to be completed, step 303-b may be performed, and the specific implementation of S303-b is the same as that of S305-a.
可以理解的是,如果通过S301-b和S302-b能够完成SDT,则接入网设备也可以通过MsgB向终端设备发送RRC释放消息或者RRC恢复消息(即将S303-b合并到302-b)。It can be understood that if the SDT can be completed through S301-b and S302-b, the access network device can also send an RRC release message or an RRC recovery message to the terminal device through MsgB (that is, merge S303-b into 302-b).
示例性地,上述S301-b至S303-b可以称为一次SDT过程。Exemplarily, the above S301-b to S303-b may be referred to as an SDT process.
也就是说,本申请实施例中,从终端设备发送随机接入前导码(或RRC恢复请求消息)到终端设备接收到RRC释放消息(用于指示终端设备结束SDT,并继续保持在非激活态)或RRC恢复消息(用于指示终端设备结束SDT,并转换到连接态)这一过程可以称为一次SDT过程。That is to say, in this embodiment of the application, from the terminal device sending the random access preamble (or RRC recovery request message) to the terminal device receiving the RRC release message (used to instruct the terminal device to end SDT and continue to remain in the inactive state ) or an RRC recovery message (used to instruct the terminal device to end the SDT and switch to the connected state) can be called an SDT process.
六、MO-SDT过程、MT-SDT过程6. MO-SDT process, MT-SDT process
第一接入网设备指示终端设备从连接态转换到非激活态后,终端设备发起SDT过程的场景可能有多种。下面描述两种可能的场景,即场景一和场景二。After the first access network device instructs the terminal device to switch from the connected state to the inactive state, there may be multiple scenarios in which the terminal device initiates the SDT process. Two possible scenarios are described below, namely Scenario 1 and Scenario 2.
场景一:终端设备移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,当终端设备需要向第二接入网设备发送上行数据时,可以发起SDT过程。该SDT过程可以称为移动引起的小数据传输(mobile originated-small data transmission,MO-SDT)过程。Scenario 1: After the terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, when the terminal device needs to send uplink data to the second access network device, an SDT process may be initiated. The SDT process may be referred to as a mobile originated-small data transmission (MO-SDT) process.
场景二:第一接入网设备从核心网设备接收到终端设备的下行数据,需要将下行数据发送给终端设备,则第一接入网设备可以在为终端设备配置的RNA内寻呼终端设备。比如,第一接入网设备为终端设备配置的RNA包括第二接入网设备的小区,则第一接入网设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RAN寻呼消息,进而第二接入网设备可以根据RAN寻呼消息,发送寻呼消息来寻呼终端设备。当终端设备接收到第二接入网设备的寻呼消息后,可以发起SDT过程。该SDT过程可以称为移动终止的小数据传输(mobile terminated-small data transmission,MT-SDT)过程。Scenario 2: The first access network device receives the downlink data of the terminal device from the core network device, and needs to send the downlink data to the terminal device, then the first access network device can page the terminal device in the RNA configured for the terminal device . For example, if the RNA configured by the first access network device for the terminal device includes the cell of the second access network device, the first access network device may send a RAN paging message to the second access network device, and then the second access network device The network device can send a paging message to page the terminal device according to the RAN paging message. After receiving the paging message from the second access network device, the terminal device may initiate an SDT process. The SDT process may be referred to as a mobile terminated-small data transmission (mobile terminated-small data transmission, MT-SDT) process.
七、终端设备的专用RLC配置、默认RLC配置7. Dedicated RLC configuration and default RLC configuration of terminal equipment
RLC配置可以包括RLC层实体对应的参数,比如RLC配置可以包括RLC层实体对从上层接收到的RLC SDU进行处理时所使用的参数,以及RLC层实体对从下层接收到的RLC PDU进行处理时所使用的参数。The RLC configuration can include the parameters corresponding to the RLC layer entity. For example, the RLC configuration can include the parameters used by the RLC layer entity to process the RLC SDU received from the upper layer, and when the RLC layer entity processes the RLC PDU received from the lower layer. parameters used.
终端设备的专用RLC配置是指终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置,终端设备的专用RLC配置可以是由第一接入网设备提供给终端设备的,不同终端设备的专用RLC配置可以不同。默认RLC配置是指预先配置在接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备、第二接入网设备)和终端设备中的RLC配置,不同终端设备的默认RLC配置可以相同,即默认RLC配置可以是多个终端设备共用的。也就是说,终端设备中可以存储两套RLC配置,一套为专用RLC配置,另一套为默认RLC配置,第一接入网设备可以存储终端设备的专用RLC配置和默认RLC配置,而第二接入网设备可以存储有默认RLC配置,未存储终端设备的专用RLC配置。The dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device refers to the RLC configuration included in the context information of the terminal device. The dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device may be provided to the terminal device by the first access network device, and the dedicated RLC configuration of different terminal devices may be different. . The default RLC configuration refers to the RLC configuration pre-configured in the access network device (such as the first access network device, the second access network device) and the terminal device. The default RLC configuration of different terminal devices can be the same, that is, the default RLC configuration It can be shared by multiple terminal devices. That is to say, two sets of RLC configurations can be stored in the terminal device, one is dedicated RLC configuration, and the other is default RLC configuration, the first access network device can store the dedicated RLC configuration and the default RLC configuration of the terminal device, and the second Second, the access network device may store a default RLC configuration and not store a dedicated RLC configuration for the terminal device.
以默认RLC配置为例,从传输方向的角度来看,默认RLC配置可以包括上行传输对应的默认RLC配置(称为上行默认RLC配置)和下行传输对应的默认RLC配置(称为下行默认RLC配置)。上行默认RLC配置用于对上行数据进行处理,比如当终端设备向第二接入网设备发送上行数据时,终端设备可以使用上行默认RLC配置对包含上行数据的 PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并将RLC PDU发送给第二接入网设备;相应地,第二接入网设备接收到RLC PDU后,可以使用上行默认RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU。下行默认RLC配置用于对下行数据进行处理,比如第二接入网设备可以使用下行默认RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并将RLC PDU发送给终端设备;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU后,可以使用下行默认RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到下行数据。Taking the default RLC configuration as an example, from the perspective of the transmission direction, the default RLC configuration can include the default RLC configuration corresponding to uplink transmission (called uplink default RLC configuration) and the default RLC configuration corresponding to downlink transmission (called downlink default RLC configuration). ). The uplink default RLC configuration is used to process uplink data. For example, when a terminal device sends uplink data to the second access network device, the terminal device can use the uplink default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU. , and send the RLC PDU to the second access network device; correspondingly, after the second access network device receives the RLC PDU, it can use the uplink default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU. The downlink default RLC configuration is used to process downlink data. For example, the second access network device can use the downlink default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and send the RLC PDU to the terminal device; Specifically, after receiving the RLC PDU, the terminal device can use the downlink default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
从传输模式的角度来看,由于不同RLC层实体可以使用不同的传输模式,比如RLC层实体使用的传输模式可以包括非确认模式(unacknowledged mode,UM)和确认模式(acknowledged mode,AM),因此,默认RLC配置可以包括UM对应的默认RLC配置(称为UM默认RLC配置)和AM对应的默认RLC配置(称为AM默认RLC配置)。可以理解的是,RLC层实体使用的传输模式还可以包括其它可能的传输模式,本申请实施例中是以UM和AM为例进行描述。当RLC层实体使用的传输模式为UM时,RLC层实体可以对递交到RLC层实体的SDU进行处理(比如可以添加额外信息),进而发送RLC PDU,且不需要对等实体的确认,也不再进行重传。当RLC层实体使用的传输模式为AM时,RLC层实体可以对递交到RLC层实体的SDU进行处理(比如可以添加额外信息),进而发送RLC PDU,且需要对等实体的确认,若对等实体确认该RLC PDU已成功接收,则无需在对该RLC PDU进行重传,否则需要对该RLC PDU进行重传。From the perspective of transmission mode, since different RLC layer entities can use different transmission modes, for example, the transmission mode used by RLC layer entities can include unacknowledged mode (unacknowledged mode, UM) and acknowledged mode (acknowledged mode, AM), so , the default RLC configuration may include a default RLC configuration corresponding to UM (called UM default RLC configuration) and a default RLC configuration corresponding to AM (called AM default RLC configuration). It can be understood that the transmission mode used by the RLC layer entity may also include other possible transmission modes, and in the embodiment of the present application, UM and AM are taken as examples for description. When the transmission mode used by the RLC layer entity is UM, the RLC layer entity can process the SDU submitted to the RLC layer entity (such as adding additional information), and then send the RLC PDU without confirmation from the peer entity, nor Then retransmit. When the transmission mode used by the RLC layer entity is AM, the RLC layer entity can process the SDU submitted to the RLC layer entity (such as adding additional information), and then send the RLC PDU, and requires the confirmation of the peer entity, if the peer If the entity confirms that the RLC PDU has been successfully received, it does not need to retransmit the RLC PDU, otherwise it needs to retransmit the RLC PDU.
结合传输方向和传输模式来看,默认RLC配置可以包括:上行UM默认RLC配置、上行AM默认RLC配置、下行UM默认RLC配置和下行AM默认RLC配置。From the perspective of transmission direction and transmission mode, the default RLC configuration may include: uplink UM default RLC configuration, uplink AM default RLC configuration, downlink UM default RLC configuration, and downlink AM default RLC configuration.
其中,①上行UM默认RLC配置可以包括:sn-FieldLength。Wherein, ① the uplink UM default RLC configuration may include: sn-FieldLength.
②上行AM默认RLC配置可以包括以下至少一项参数:sn-FieldLength,t-PollRetransmit,pollPDU,pollByte,maxRetxThrehold。② Uplink AM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-PollRetransmit, pollPDU, pollByte, maxRetxThrehold.
③下行UM默认RLC配置可以包括以下至少一项参数:sn-FieldLength,t-Reassembly。③ The downlink UM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-Reassembly.
④下行AM默认RLC配置可以包括以下至少一项参数:sn-FieldLength,t-Reassembly,t-StatusProhibit。④ The downlink AM default RLC configuration may include at least one of the following parameters: sn-FieldLength, t-Reassembly, t-StatusProhibit.
上述sn-FieldLength,t-PollRetransmit,pollPDU,pollByte,maxRetxThrehold,t-Reassembly,t-StatusProhibit等参数可以参见3GPP标准规范中的定义。For the above sn-FieldLength, t-PollRetransmit, pollPDU, pollByte, maxRetxThrehold, t-Reassembly, t-StatusProhibit and other parameters, please refer to the definition in the 3GPP standard specification.
八、第一处理、第二处理Eight, the first treatment, the second treatment
如前文所述,接入网设备和终端设备之间的通信涉及PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层、物理层等协议层,针对于RLC层来说,终端设备或接入网设备的RLC层实体可以对从上层(PDCP层)接收到的RLC SDU(或者说PDCP PDU)进行处理得到RLC PDU,并递交到下层,以及也可以对从下层(MAC层)接收到的RLC PDU(或者说MAC SDU)进行处理得到RLC SDU,并递交到上层。As mentioned above, the communication between the access network device and the terminal device involves the PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, physical layer and other protocol layers. For the RLC layer, the RLC layer entity of the terminal device or the access network device The RLC SDU (or PDCP PDU) received from the upper layer (PDCP layer) can be processed to obtain the RLC PDU and submitted to the lower layer, and the RLC PDU (or MAC SDU) received from the lower layer (MAC layer) can also be processed. ) to obtain the RLC SDU and submit it to the upper layer.
为便于描述,本申请实施例中将RLC层实体对从上层接收到的PDCP PDU所进行的处理称为第一处理,将RLC层实体对从下层接收到的RLC PDU所进行的处理称为第二处理,第二处理为第一处理的逆过程。For the convenience of description, in the embodiment of the present application, the processing performed by the RLC layer entity on the PDCP PDU received from the upper layer is called the first processing, and the processing performed by the RLC layer entity on the RLC PDU received from the lower layer is called the second processing. Two processing, the second processing is the reverse process of the first processing.
此外,为便于说明RLC层实体所进行的处理,本申请实施例下文中在描述终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信时,可能会涉及如下描述:“终端设备向接入网设备发送RLC PDU”、“接入网设备向终端设备发送RLC PDU”等,以及本申请实施例下文中在描述第一接入网设备与第二接入网设备之间的通信时,可能会涉及如下描述:“第一接入网设备向第二接入网 设备发送PDCP PDU”、“第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU”等。In addition, in order to facilitate the description of the processing performed by the RLC layer entity, when describing the communication between the terminal device and the access network device in the following embodiments of the present application, the following description may be involved: "The terminal device sends the RLC PDU", "the access network device sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device", etc., and the following description may be involved when describing the communication between the first access network device and the second access network device in the following embodiments of this application : "The first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device", "the first access network device sends an RLC PDU to the second access network device", etc.
其中,“终端设备向接入网设备发送RLC PDU”可以是指,终端设备的RLC层实体向下层递交RLC PDU,以发送给接入网设备。比如,终端设备的RLC层实体将RLC PDU递交到MAC层,再由MAC层实体生成传输块,然后通过对应的物理层实体发送给接入网设备。“接入网设备向终端设备发送RLC PDU”,可以是指,接入网设备的RLC层实体向下层递交RLC PDU,以发送给终端设备。比如,接入网设备的RLC层实体将RLC PDU递交到MAC层,再由MAC层实体生成传输块,然后通过对应的物理层实体发送给终端设备。Wherein, "the terminal device sends the RLC PDU to the access network device" may mean that the RLC layer entity of the terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the lower layer for sending to the access network device. For example, the RLC layer entity of the terminal device submits the RLC PDU to the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transport block, and then sends it to the access network device through the corresponding physical layer entity. "The access network device sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device" may mean that the RLC layer entity of the access network device submits the RLC PDU to the lower layer for sending to the terminal device. For example, the RLC layer entity of the access network device submits the RLC PDU to the MAC layer, and then the MAC layer entity generates a transport block, and then sends it to the terminal device through the corresponding physical layer entity.
“第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送PDCP PDU”可以是指,第一接入网设备通过Xn接口向第二接入网设备发送PDCP PDU;“第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU”可以是指,第一接入网设备通过Xn接口向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU。"The first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device" may mean that the first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device through the Xn interface; "the first access network device sends a PDCP PDU to the second access network device; "The second access network device sends the RLC PDU" may refer to that the first access network device sends the RLC PDU to the second access network device through the Xn interface.
九、锚点重定位9. Anchor point relocation
锚点重定位可以理解为:当终端设备处于非激活态时,网络侧为终端设备创建的无线承载对应的PDCP层实体的重定位。在执行锚点重定位之前,网络侧为终端设备创建的无线承载对应的PDCP层实***于第一接入网设备,即由第一接入网设备为终端设备创建无线承载对应的PDCP层实体;比如,在终端设备进入非激活态之前,终端设备与第一接入网设备建立有RRC连接,此时第一接入网设备可以为终端设备创建无线承载对应的PDCP层实体。在执行锚点重定位之后,网络侧为终端设备创建的无线承载所对应的PDCP层实***于第二接入网设备,即由第二接入网设备为终端设备创建无线承载对应的PDCP层实体;比如,在非激活态的终端设备移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,第二接入网设备可以根据来自第一接入网设备的执行锚点重定位的指示和终端设备的上下文信息,为终端设备创建无线承载对应的PDCP层实体。可选地,在执行锚点重定位之后,第一接入网设备可以释放之前为终端设备创建的无线承载对应的PDCP层实体。Anchor point relocation can be understood as: when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the relocation of the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created for the terminal device by the network side. Before anchor relocation is performed, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the network side for the terminal device is located in the first access network device, that is, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer is created by the first access network device for the terminal device; For example, before the terminal device enters the inactive state, the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the first access network device. At this time, the first access network device may create a PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer for the terminal device. After anchor relocation is performed, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the network side for the terminal device is located on the second access network device, that is, the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer created by the second access network device for the terminal device ; For example, after an inactive terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the second access network device may execute anchor relocation instructions from the first access network device and the terminal device's The context information is used to create the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer for the terminal device. Optionally, after anchor relocation is performed, the first access network device may release the PDCP layer entity corresponding to the radio bearer previously created for the terminal device.
基于上述相关技术特征的介绍,本申请实施例提供的一种可能的方案为,当终端设备处于非激活态时,终端设备与接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备)可以使用终端设备的专用RLC配置进行数据传输。Based on the introduction of the above-mentioned related technical features, a possible solution provided by the embodiment of this application is that when the terminal device is in the inactive state, the terminal device and the access network device (such as the first access network device or the second access network device) network equipment) can use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal equipment for data transmission.
比如,终端设备在第一接入网设备的覆盖区域,则终端设备与第一接入网设备进行数据传输。具体来说,以上行传输为例,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并将RLC PDU发送给第一接入网设备;相应地,第一接入网设备接收到RLC PDU后,可以使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到上行数据。For example, if the terminal device is in the coverage area of the first access network device, the terminal device performs data transmission with the first access network device. Specifically, taking the uplink transmission as an example, the terminal device can use a dedicated RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU, and send the RLC PDU to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first After receiving the RLC PDU, the access network device can use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain uplink data.
又比如,终端设备从第一接入网设备的覆盖区域移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域,则终端设备可以与第二接入网设备进行数据传输。具体来说,以上行传输为例,当终端设备向第二接入网设备发送上行数据时,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并将RLC PDU发送给第二接入网设备。由于第二接入网设备未存储终端设备的专用RLC配置,因此,第二接入网设备需要先从第一接入网设备获取终端设备的专用RLC配置,进而使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对接收到的RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到上行数据。For another example, when the terminal device moves from the coverage area of the first access network device to the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device may perform data transmission with the second access network device. Specifically, taking the uplink transmission as an example, when the terminal device sends uplink data to the second access network device, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing the uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and convert the RLC The PDU is sent to the second access network device. Since the second access network device does not store the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, the second access network device needs to first obtain the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device from the first access network device, and then use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to The received RLC PDU is subjected to the second processing to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parsed to obtain the uplink data.
针对于终端设备与第二接入网设备进行数据传输的情形,下面结合图4描述一种可能 的实现流程。For the situation where the terminal device and the second access network device perform data transmission, a possible implementation process is described below in conjunction with FIG. 4 .
图4为本申请实施例提供的终端设备在非激活态下进行数据传输的一种流程示意图。如图4所示,该流程可以包括:FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of data transmission performed by a terminal device in an inactive state provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the process can include:
S401,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送RRC释放消息1,RRC释放消息1用于指示终端设备进入非激活态;相应地,终端设备接收RRC释放消息1。S401. The first access network device sends an RRC release message 1 to the terminal device, where the RRC release message 1 is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the RRC release message 1.
S402,终端设备从第一接入网设备的覆盖区域移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域,并向第二接入网设备发送RRC恢复请求消息。S402. The terminal device moves from the coverage area of the first access network device to the coverage area of the second access network device, and sends an RRC recovery request message to the second access network device.
此处,比如终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送四步随机接入过程中的消息3或者两步随机接入过程中的消息A,其中,消息3或消息A包括RRC恢复请求消息。Here, for example, the terminal device may send message 3 in the four-step random access process or message A in the two-step random access process to the second access network device, where message 3 or message A includes the RRC recovery request message.
S403,第二接入网设备接收到RRC恢复请求消息后,向第一接入网设备发送UE上下文索取请求(retrieve UE context request)消息;相应地,第一接入网设备可以接收UE上下文索取请求消息。S403. After receiving the RRC recovery request message, the second access network device sends a UE context request (retrieve UE context request) message to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device may receive the UE context request request message.
此处,UE上下文索取请求消息可以包括终端设备的非激活态-无线网络临时标识(inactive-radio network temporary identity,I-RNTI),进而第一接入网设备可以根据I-RNTI,确定终端设备的上下文信息。Here, the UE context request message may include an inactive-radio network temporary identity (inactive-radio network temporary identity, I-RNTI) of the terminal device, and then the first access network device may determine the terminal device according to the I-RNTI contextual information.
S404,第一接入网设备判断是否执行锚点重定位,若确定执行锚点重定位,则执行S405-a至S410-a,若确定不执行锚点重定位,则执行S405-b至S408-b。S404, the first access network device judges whether to perform anchor relocation, if it is determined to perform anchor relocation, perform S405-a to S410-a, if it determines not to perform anchor relocation, perform S405-b to S408 -b.
S405-a,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送UE上下文索取响应(retrieve UE context response)消息;相应地,第二接入网设备接收UE上下文索取响应消息。S405-a. The first access network device sends a UE context retrieval response (retrieve UE context response) message to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network device receives the UE context retrieval response message.
此处,UE上下文索取响应可以包括终端设备的上下文信息和锚点重定位信息1,锚点重定位信息1用于指示执行锚点重定位。其中,上下文信息包括终端设备的专用RLC配置,进而第二接入网设备可以从上下文信息中获取到终端设备的专用RLC配置。Here, the UE context request response may include context information of the terminal device and anchor relocation information 1, where the anchor relocation information 1 is used to indicate execution of anchor relocation. Wherein, the context information includes the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, and then the second access network device can acquire the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device from the context information.
S406-a,第二接入网设备执行路径切换,比如第二接入网设备向AMF网元发送路径切换请求消息,相应地,AMF网元接收路径切换请求消息。S406-a, the second access network device performs path switching, for example, the second access network device sends a path switching request message to the AMF network element, and correspondingly, the AMF network element receives the path switching request message.
S407-a,AMF网元向第二接入网设备发送路径切换响应消息,相应地,第二接入网设备接收路径切换响应消息,进而完成路径切换。S407-a, the AMF network element sends a path switch response message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device receives the path switch response message, and then completes the path switch.
此处,路径切换是指终端设备的数据传输路径由“UPF网元─第一接入网设备─终端设备”切换为“UPF网元─第二接入网设备─终端设备”。也就是说,在路径切换后,下行数据可以由UPF网元发送给第二接入网设备,进而由第二接入网设备发送给终端设备;上行数据可以由终端设备发送给第二接入网设备,进而由第二接入网设备发送给UPF网元。Here, path switching means that the data transmission path of the terminal device is switched from "UPF network element-first access network device-terminal device" to "UPF network element-second access network device-terminal device". That is to say, after path switching, the downlink data can be sent by the UPF network element to the second access network device, and then sent by the second access network device to the terminal device; the uplink data can be sent by the terminal device to the second access network device. network equipment, and then sent to the UPF network element by the second access network equipment.
S408-a,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送地址指示信息。S408-a, the second access network device sends address indication information to the first access network device.
此处,地址指示信息指示第一接入网设备进行数据(即下行数据)转发的地址。Here, the address indication information indicates the address where the first access network device forwards data (that is, downlink data).
如果在路径切换之前,第一接入网设备从UPF网元接收到终端设备的下行数据,则可以根据地址指示信息,将该下行数据转发给第二接入网设备,由第二接入网设备发送给终端设备。If the first access network device receives the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element before the path switching, it can forward the downlink data to the second access network device according to the address indication information, and the second access network device The device sends to the end device.
S409-a,第二接入网设备和终端设备使用终端设备的专用RLC配置进行数据传输。S409-a, the second access network device and the terminal device use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform data transmission.
比如,针对于上行传输,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,进而将RLC PDU发送给第二接入网设备;相应地,第二接入网设备可以使用专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到下行数据,并将下行数据发送给UPF网元。For example, for uplink transmission, the terminal device can use a dedicated RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain an RLC PDU, and then send the RLC PDU to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network The device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parse the downlink data, and send the downlink data to the UPF network element.
针对于下行传输,第二接入网设备可以从UPF网元接收到终端设备的下行数据(可选地,第二接入网设备也可能从第一接入网设备接收终端设备的下行数据),并使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,进而将RLC PDU发送给终端设备;相应地,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到下行数据。For downlink transmission, the second access network device may receive the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element (optionally, the second access network device may also receive the downlink data of the terminal device from the first access network device) , and use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and then send the RLC PDU to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU Obtain PDCP PDU, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
S410-a,第二接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成时,可以生成RRC释放消息2,并使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对包含RRC释放消息2的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,进而发送给终端设备,RRC释放消息2用于指示终端设备结束SDT并继续保持在非激活态。相应地,终端设备可以接收RLC PDU,使用专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到RRC释放消息2,并根据RRC释放消息2结束SDT并继续保持在非激活态。S410-a, when the second access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate an RRC release message 2, and use the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing the RRC release message 2 to obtain an RLC PDU, and then Sent to the terminal equipment, the RRC release message 2 is used to instruct the terminal equipment to end the SDT and remain in an inactive state. Correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the RLC PDU, use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then analyze and obtain the RRC release message 2, and end the SDT according to the RRC release message 2 and continue to remain in the inactive state.
S405-b,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送失败响应消息,失败响应消息中包括终端设备的上下文信息和锚点重定位信息2,锚点重定位信息2用于指示不执行锚点重定位。S405-b. The first access network device sends a failure response message to the second access network device. The failure response message includes context information of the terminal device and anchor relocation information 2, and the anchor relocation information 2 is used to indicate that Perform anchor relocation.
S406-b,第一接入网设备通过第二接入网设备和终端设备使用终端设备的专用RLC配置进行数据传输。S406-b. The first access network device performs data transmission by using the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device through the second access network device and the terminal device.
比如,针对于上行传输,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并发送给第二接入网设备。第二接入网设备接收到RLC PDU,使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行处理得到PDCP PDU,并向第一接入网设备发送PDCP PDU。第一接入网设备接收PDCP PDU,解析得到上行数据,进而将上行数据发送给UPF网元。For example, for uplink transmission, the terminal device may use dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and send it to the second access network device. The second access network device receives the RLC PDU, uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to process the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU, and sends the PDCP PDU to the first access network device. The first access network device receives the PDCP PDU, parses to obtain the uplink data, and then sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
针对于下行传输,UPF网元向第一接入网设备发送下行数据。第一接入网设备接收下行数据,并向第二接入网设备发送包含下行数据的PDCP PDU。第二接入网设备接收PDCP PDU,使用专用RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,并将RLC PDU发送给终端设备。终端设备接收到RLC PDU,使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到下行数据。For downlink transmission, the UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device. The first access network device receives the downlink data, and sends a PDCP PDU containing the downlink data to the second access network device. The second access network device receives the PDCP PDU, uses dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU containing downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU, and sends the RLC PDU to the terminal device. The terminal device receives the RLC PDU, uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to process the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then parses to obtain the downlink data.
S407-b,第一接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成时,可以生成RRC释放消息2,并向第二接入网设备发送包含RRC释放消息2的PDCP PDU;其中,RRC释放消息2用于指示终端设备结束数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。S407-b. When the first access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate an RRC release message 2, and send a PDCP PDU containing the RRC release message 2 to the second access network device; wherein, the RRC release message 2 is used for Instructs the end device to end data transmission and to remain inactive.
S408-b,第二接入网设备使用终端设备的专用RLC配置对包含RRC释放消息2的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,进而发送给终端设备。相应地,终端设备可以接收RLC PDU,使用专用RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU,进而解析得到RRC释放消息2,并根据RRC释放消息2结束数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。S408-b. The second access network device uses the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU including the RRC release message 2 to obtain the RLC PDU, and then sends it to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device can receive the RLC PDU, use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU, and then analyze and obtain the RRC release message 2, and end the data transmission according to the RRC release message 2 and continue to remain in the inactive state.
基于上述相关技术特征的介绍,本申请实施例提供的又一种可能的方案为,当终端设备处于非激活态时,终端设备与接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备)可以使用默认RLC配置进行数据传输。Based on the introduction of the above-mentioned related technical features, another possible solution provided by the embodiment of this application is that when the terminal device is in the inactive state, the terminal device and the access network device (such as the first access network device or the second access network device) network access device) can use the default RLC configuration for data transmission.
下面实施例一和实施例二,对终端设备与接入网设备使用默认RLC配置进行数据传输的一些可能的实现进行描述。 Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2 below describe some possible implementations in which the terminal device and the access network device use the default RLC configuration for data transmission.
实施例一Embodiment one
图5A至图5C为本申请实施例一提供的通信方法所对应的一些流程示意图。其中,图5A至图5C中的S501至S504是相同的。5A to 5C are schematic flowcharts corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application. Wherein, S501 to S504 in FIG. 5A to FIG. 5C are the same.
S501,第一接入网设备确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置。S501. The first access network device determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that a default RLC configuration is used when the terminal device is in an inactive state.
S502,第一接入网设备向终端设备或第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息。S502. The first access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
此处,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的实现方式可以有多种,一种可能的实现方式为:第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一RRC释放消息,第一RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备进入非激活态,第一RRC释放消息包括第一指示信息。相应地,终端设备可以接收第一RRC释放消息,并获取到第一指示信息。需要说明的是,终端设备在接收第一RRC释放消息之前可能处于连接态或非激活态,若终端设备在接收第一RRC释放消息之前处于连接态,则终端设备可以根据第一RRC释放消息从连接态转换到非激活态;若终端设备在接收第一RRC释放消息之前处于非激活态,则终端设备可以根据第一RRC释放消息继续保持在非激活态。Here, the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device in various ways, one possible way is: the first access network device sends the first RRC release message to the terminal device, and the second An RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal equipment to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes first indication information. Correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the first RRC release message, and obtain the first indication information. It should be noted that the terminal device may be in a connected state or in an inactive state before receiving the first RRC release message. The connected state is converted to the inactive state; if the terminal device is in the inactive state before receiving the first RRC release message, the terminal device may continue to remain in the inactive state according to the first RRC release message.
第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息的实现方式可以有多种,一种可能的实现方式为:第一接入网设备从核心网设备接收到终端设备(此时终端设备处于非激活态)的下行数据,需要将下行数据发送给终端设备,则第一接入网设备可以在为终端设备配置的RNA内寻呼终端设备。比如,第一接入网设备为终端设备配置的RNA包括第二接入网设备的小区,则第一接入网设备可以向第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,第一寻呼消息用于指示第二接入网设备寻呼终端设备,第一寻呼消息包括第一指示信息。相应地,第二接入网设备接收到第一寻呼消息后,可以在第二接入网设备的小区内发送第二寻呼消息,第二寻呼消息用于寻呼终端设备,第二寻呼消息包括第一指示信息和终端设备的标识。以及,第一接入网设备还可以发送第三寻呼消息,第三寻呼消息用于寻呼终端设备,第三寻呼消息包括第一指示信息和终端设备的标识。若终端设备在第二接入网设备的小区内,则终端设备可以接收第二寻呼消息,并从第二寻呼消息中获取第一指示信息;若终端设备在第一接入网设备的小区内,则终端设备可以接收第三寻呼消息,并从第三寻呼消息中获取第一指示信息。该实施例将以终端设备在第二接入网设备的小区内为例进行描述。There are many ways to realize that the first access network device sends the first indication information to the second access network device. One possible way is: the first access network device receives the terminal device from the core network device (this When the terminal device is in an inactive state), the downlink data needs to be sent to the terminal device, then the first access network device can page the terminal device in the RNA configured for the terminal device. For example, if the RNA configured by the first access network device for the terminal device includes the cell of the second access network device, the first access network device may send a first paging message to the second access network device, and the first paging message The message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device, and the first paging message includes the first indication information. Correspondingly, after receiving the first paging message, the second access network device may send a second paging message in the cell of the second access network device, the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device. The paging message includes first indication information and an identifier of the terminal device. And, the first access network device may also send a third paging message, the third paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the third paging message includes the first indication information and the identifier of the terminal device. If the terminal device is in the cell of the second access network device, the terminal device can receive the second paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the second paging message; if the terminal device is in the cell of the first access network device In the cell, the terminal device may receive the third paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the third paging message. This embodiment will be described by taking the terminal device in the cell of the second access network device as an example.
可以理解地,在前文所描述的场景一中,第一接入网设备可以通过第一RRC释放消息将第一指示信息发送给终端设备。在前文所描述的场景二中,第一接入网设备可以通过第一RRC释放消息将第一指示信息发送给终端设备,或者第一接入网设备也可以通过第一寻呼消息将第一指示信息发送给第二接入网设备,进而由第二接入网设备将第一指示信息发送给终端设备。It can be understood that, in the first scenario described above, the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message. In the second scenario described above, the first access network device may send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message, or the first access network device may also send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first paging message. The indication information is sent to the second access network device, and then the second access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
下面针对第一指示信息的一些可能的实现进行描述。The following describes some possible implementations of the first indication information.
(1)作为一种可能的实现,第一指示信息可以对应第一SDT过程,此种情形下,第一指示信息可以指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,在第一SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置。(1) As a possible implementation, the first indication information may correspond to the first SDT process. In this case, the first indication information may indicate that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC in the first SDT process configuration.
示例性地,第一SDT过程可以是协议预先约定的,比如第一SDT过程为终端设备接收到第一指示信息之后的首次SDT过程,首次SDT过程可以为MO-SDT过程或MT-SDT过程,具体不做限定。Exemplarily, the first SDT process may be pre-agreed by the protocol, for example, the first SDT process is the first SDT process after the terminal device receives the first indication information, and the first SDT process may be the MO-SDT process or the MT-SDT process, There is no specific limit.
(2)作为一种可能的实现,第一指示信息可以对应第一区域,此种情形下,第一指示信息可以指示当终端设备位于第一区域且处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置。(2) As a possible implementation, the first indication information may correspond to the first area. In this case, the first indication information may indicate that when the terminal device is located in the first area and in an inactive state, use a default RLC configuration.
示例性地,第一区域可以是协议预先约定的;或者,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备 发送第一信息,第一信息用于确定第一区域,或者说第一信息用于配置第一区域。比如,第一区域包括一个或多个小区,则第一信息可以为小区列表信息,小区列表信息包括一个或多个小区的标识。可以理解地,第一指示信息可以包括第一信息;或者,第一指示信息不包括第一信息,此种情形下,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一信息的方式可以和第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的方式相同,比如第一信息和第一指示信息可以承载于同一消息。Exemplarily, the first area may be pre-agreed in the agreement; or, the first access network device may send first information to the terminal device, and the first information is used to determine the first area, or in other words, the first information is used to configure the first area. an area. For example, if the first area includes one or more cells, the first information may be cell list information, and the cell list information includes identifiers of one or more cells. It can be understood that the first indication information may include the first information; or, the first indication information may not include the first information. In this case, the manner in which the first access network device sends the first information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first information. The manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the first information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
示例性地,第一区域可以包括终端设备的RNA,或者第一区域可以为终端设备的RNA。Exemplarily, the first region may include the RNA of the terminal device, or the first region may be the RNA of the terminal device.
(3)作为一种可能的实现,第一指示信息对应M个RLC层实体,此种情形下,第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,M个RLC层实体使用默认RLC配置。其中,M为正整数。(3) As a possible implementation, the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities. In this case, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, the M RLC layer entities use a default RLC configuration. Wherein, M is a positive integer.
示例性地,M个RLC层实体可以是协议预先约定的。或者,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第二信息,第二信息用于确定M个RLC层实体。可以理解地,第一指示信息可以包括第二信息;或者,第一指示信息不包括第二信息,此种情形下,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第二信息的方式可以和第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的方式相同,比如第二信息和第一指示信息可以承载于同一消息。Exemplarily, the M RLC layer entities may be pre-agreed in the protocol. Alternatively, the first access network device may send the second information to the terminal device, where the second information is used to determine the M RLC layer entities. It can be understood that the first indication information may include the second information; or, the first indication information may not include the second information, in this case, the manner in which the first access network device sends the second information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first The manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the second information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
①比如,第二信息可以包括一个或多个无线承载的标识,则M个RLC层实体为该一个或多个无线承载对应的RLC层实体。其中,一个或多个无线承载可以包括第一无线承载,第一无线承载可以为DRB或者SRB。举个例子,第一无线承载对应的RLC层实体为RLC层实体1,RLC层实体1使用的传输模式为AM,则终端设备接收到第一指示信息后,RLC层实体1可以使用上行AM默认RLC配置对从PDCP层接收到的PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,以及使用下行AM默认RLC配置对从MAC层接收到的RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU。① For example, the second information may include identifiers of one or more radio bearers, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the one or more radio bearers. Wherein, the one or more radio bearers may include a first radio bearer, and the first radio bearer may be a DRB or an SRB. For example, the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer is RLC layer entity 1, and the transmission mode used by RLC layer entity 1 is AM, then after the terminal device receives the first indication information, RLC layer entity 1 can use the uplink AM default The RLC configuration performs the first processing on the PDCP PDU received from the PDCP layer to obtain the RLC PDU, and uses the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU received from the MAC layer to obtain the PDCP PDU.
可选地,第二信息还可以包括重配置信息,重配置信息用于重配置M个RLC层实体使用的传输模式。当第一指示信息包括第二信息时,在一个示例中,第一指示信息可以包括无线承载的标识和RLC配置的对应关系,如表1所示。Optionally, the second information may further include reconfiguration information, and the reconfiguration information is used to reconfigure the transmission modes used by the M RLC layer entities. When the first indication information includes the second information, in an example, the first indication information may include a correspondence between a radio bearer identifier and an RLC configuration, as shown in Table 1.
表1:第一指示信息所包括的内容示例Table 1: Example of content included in the first indication information
无线承载的标识radio bearer identification | 对应的RLC配置Corresponding RLC configuration |
RB1RB1 | AM默认RLC配置AM default RLC configuration |
RB2RB2 | UM默认RLC配置UM default RLC configuration |
假设终端设备在接收到如表1所示的第一指示信息之前,RB1对应的RLC层实体的传输模式为UM,RB2对应的RLC层实体的传输模式为AM,则终端设备在接收到如表1所示的第一指示信息之后,RB1对应的RLC层实体可以使用AM默认RLC配置(具体地,RB1对应的RLC层实体可以使用上行AM默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,以及使用下行AM默认RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU),RB2对应的RLC层实体可以使用UM默认RLC配置(具体地,RB2对应的RLC层实体可以使用上行UM默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU进行第一处理得到RLC PDU,以及使用下行AM默认RLC配置对RLC PDU进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU)。Assuming that before the terminal device receives the first indication information shown in Table 1, the transmission mode of the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB1 is UM, and the transmission mode of the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB2 is AM, then the terminal device receives the information shown in Table 1 After the first indication information shown in 1, the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB1 can use the AM default RLC configuration (specifically, the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB1 can use the uplink AM default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU to obtain the RLC PDU, And use the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU), the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB2 can use the UM default RLC configuration (specifically, the RLC layer entity corresponding to RB2 can use the uplink UM default RLC configuration to support PDCP The PDU performs the first processing to obtain the RLC PDU, and uses the downlink AM default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on the RLC PDU to obtain the PDCP PDU).
也就是说,当第二信息包括第一无线承载的标识,而不包括重配置信息时,第一无线承载对应的RLC层实体可以沿用之前的传输模式,并使用之前的传输模式对应的默认RLC 配置。当第二信息包括第一无线承载的标识和重配置信息时,第一无线承载对应的RLC层实体可以使用重配置后的传输模式对应的默认RLC配置。That is to say, when the second information includes the identifier of the first radio bearer but does not include the reconfiguration information, the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer can follow the previous transmission mode and use the default RLC corresponding to the previous transmission mode. configuration. When the second information includes the identifier of the first radio bearer and reconfiguration information, the RLC layer entity corresponding to the first radio bearer may use the default RLC configuration corresponding to the reconfigured transmission mode.
②比如,第二信息可以指示一种或多种传输模式,则M个RLC层实体可以为使用该一种或多种传输模式的RLC层实体。举个例子,该一种或多种传输模式中包括第一传输模式,假设第一传输模式为AM,使用AM的RLC层实体包括RLC层实体2,则RLC层实体2可以使用AM默认RLC配置。② For example, the second information may indicate one or more transmission modes, then the M RLC layer entities may be RLC layer entities using the one or more transmission modes. For example, the one or more transmission modes include the first transmission mode, assuming that the first transmission mode is AM, and the RLC layer entities using AM include RLC layer entity 2, then the RLC layer entity 2 can use the AM default RLC configuration .
(4)作为一种可能的实现,第一指示信息对应第一传输方向,此种情形下,第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,在第一传输方向上使用默认RLC配置。(4) As a possible implementation, the first indication information corresponds to the first transmission direction. In this case, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used in the first transmission direction.
示例性地,第一传输方向可以是协议预先约定的。或者,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第三信息,第三信息用于确定第一传输方向。可以理解地,第一指示信息可以包括第三信息;或者,第一指示信息不包括第三信息,此种情形下,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第三信息的方式可以和第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息的方式相同,比如第三信息和第一指示信息可以承载于同一消息。Exemplarily, the first transmission direction may be pre-agreed in the protocol. Alternatively, the first access network device may send third information to the terminal device, where the third information is used to determine the first transmission direction. It can be understood that the first indication information may include the third information; or, the first indication information does not include the third information, in this case, the manner in which the first access network device sends the third information to the terminal device may be the same as that of the first The manner in which the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the third information and the first indication information may be carried in the same message.
其中,第一传输方向可以为上行传输方向,或者第一传输方向也可以为下行传输方向,又或者第一传输方向包括上行传输方向和下行传输方向。Wherein, the first transmission direction may be an uplink transmission direction, or the first transmission direction may also be a downlink transmission direction, or the first transmission direction includes an uplink transmission direction and a downlink transmission direction.
可以理解地,针对第一指示信息,上述(1)至(4)中的实现可以分别独立存在,或者(1)至(4)中的至少两种实现可以共存。比如,第一指示信息可以对应第一区域、第一SDT过程、M个RLC层实体以及第一传输方向,此种情形下,第一指示信息指示当终端设备位于第一区域且处于非激活态时,在第一SDT过程中M个RLC层实体在第一传输方向上使用默认RLC配置。It can be understood that, for the first indication information, the implementations in (1) to (4) above may exist independently, or at least two implementations in (1) to (4) may coexist. For example, the first indication information may correspond to the first area, the first SDT process, M RLC layer entities, and the first transmission direction. In this case, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state When , in the first SDT process, the M RLC layer entities use the default RLC configuration in the first transmission direction.
本申请实施例下文中,将以“第一指示信息对应第一区域、第一SDT过程、M个RLC层实体以及第一传输方向,其中,第一区域包括第二接入网设备的小区,第一SDT过程为终端设备接收到第一指示信息之后的首次SDT过程,M个RLC层实体为第一SDT过程所涉及的所有RLC层实体,第一传输方向包括上行传输方向和下行传输方向”为例进行描述。Hereinafter in the embodiment of the present application, "the first indication information corresponds to the first area, the first SDT process, M RLC layer entities, and the first transmission direction, wherein the first area includes the cell of the second access network device, The first SDT process is the first SDT process after the terminal device receives the first indication information, the M RLC layer entities are all RLC layer entities involved in the first SDT process, and the first transmission direction includes the uplink transmission direction and the downlink transmission direction" As an example to describe.
S503,终端设备根据第一指示信息,使用默认RLC配置对包含RRC恢复请求消息的PDCP PDU1进行第一处理得到RLC PDU1,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1;相应地,第二接入网设备接收RLC PDU1。S503. According to the first indication information, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU1 containing the RRC recovery request message to obtain RLC PDU1, and then sends RLC PDU1 to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network device The network device receives RLC PDU1.
作为一种可能的实现,终端设备接收到第一指示信息后,可以根据第一指示信息,确定是否使用默认RLC配置。比如,第一指示信息指示当终端设备位于第一区域且处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置,则当终端设备需要发送RRC恢复请求消息时,若满足“位于第一区域且处于非激活态”这一条件,便可以使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU1进行第一处理得到RLC PDU1,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1。As a possible implementation, after receiving the first indication information, the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information. For example, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is in an inactive state, the default RLC configuration is used. With this condition, the default RLC configuration can be used to perform first processing on PDCP PDU1 to obtain RLC PDU1, and then send RLC PDU1 to the second access network device.
作为又一种可能的实现,终端设备接收到第一指示信息后,可以根据第一指示信息以及其它可能的信息,确定是否使用默认RLC配置。比如,终端设备可以根据第一指示信息和第二接入网设备的能力信息,确定是否使用默认RLC配置。具体地,若第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置,则终端设备可以根据第一指示信息,使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU1进行第一处理得到RLC PDU1,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1;若第二接入网设备不支持默认RLC配置,则终端设备使用专用RLC配置对PDCP PDU1进行第一处理得到RLC PDU1,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1。As yet another possible implementation, after receiving the first indication information, the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information and other possible information. For example, the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the first indication information and the capability information of the second access network device. Specifically, if the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on PDCP PDU1 according to the first indication information to obtain RLC PDU1, and then send the RLC PDU1 to the second access network device. PDU1; if the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration, the terminal device uses a dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU1 to obtain RLC PDU1, and then sends RLC PDU1 to the second access network device.
其中,第二接入网设备的能力信息用于指示第二接入网设备是否支持默认RLC配置的 方式可以有多种。比如,第二接入网设备的能力信息可以包括1个比特,当该比特的取值为“1”时,表示第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置,当该比特的取值为“0”时,表示第二接入网设备不支持默认RLC配置。终端设备获取第二接入网设备的能力信息的方式可以有多种,比如,终端设备在移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,可以接收第二接入网设备发送的***消息,***消息中包括第二接入网设备的能力信息。There may be multiple ways in which the capability information of the second access network device is used to indicate whether the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. For example, the capability information of the second access network device may include 1 bit. When the value of this bit is "1", it means that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. When the value of this bit is "0", ", it means that the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration. There are many ways for the terminal device to obtain the capability information of the second access network device. For example, after the terminal device moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, it may receive a system message sent by the second access network device, The system message includes capability information of the second access network device.
可以理解的是:本申请实施例中的“能力信息”可以替换为“使能信息”。以第二接入网设备为例,“第二接入网设备的能力信息”可以替换为“第二接入网设备的使能信息”,第二接入网设备的使能信息用于指示是否使能第二接入网设备的默认RLC配置,若使能第二接入网设备的默认RLC配置,则表示第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置,若去使能第二接入网设备的默认RLC配置,则表示第二接入网设备不支持默认RLC配置。It can be understood that: "capability information" in the embodiment of the present application may be replaced with "enabling information". Taking the second access network device as an example, the "capability information of the second access network device" can be replaced with "enabling information of the second access network device", and the enabling information of the second access network device is used to indicate Whether to enable the default RLC configuration of the second access network device. If the default RLC configuration of the second access network device is enabled, it means that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. If the second access network device is disabled The default RLC configuration of the device indicates that the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration.
S504,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送请求消息,请求消息用于请求终端设备的上下文信息,请求消息可以包括终端设备的标识,比如终端设备的I-RNTI;相应地,第一接入网设备接收请求消息。S504, the second access network device sends a request message to the first access network device, the request message is used to request the context information of the terminal device, and the request message may include the identifier of the terminal device, such as the I-RNTI of the terminal device; correspondingly, The first access network device receives the request message.
可选地,请求消息还可以包括其它可能的信息。比如,请求消息还可以包括第二接入网设备的能力信息。又比如,针对于场景一,请求消息还可以包括信息a,信息a可以用于指示第二接入网设备请求终端设备的上下文信息的原因为终端设备发起MO-SDT过程,针对于场景二,请求消息还可以包括信息b,信息b可以用于指示第二接入网设备请求终端设备的上下文信息的原因为终端设备发起MT-SDT过程。其中,信息a和信息b也可以称为原因值。Optionally, the request message may also include other possible information. For example, the request message may also include capability information of the second access network device. For another example, for scenario 1, the request message may also include information a, and information a may be used to indicate that the reason why the second access network device requests the context information of the terminal device is that the terminal device initiates the MO-SDT process. For scenario 2, The request message may further include information b, and the information b may be used to indicate that the reason why the second access network device requests the context information of the terminal device is that the terminal device initiates an MT-SDT process. Wherein, information a and information b may also be referred to as cause values.
第一接入网设备可以根据请求消息所包括的终端设备的标识,确定终端设备是否使用默认RLC配置。若终端设备不使用默认RLC配置,则后续实现可以参见现有技术;若终端设备使用默认RLC配置,则可以确定是否执行锚点重定位,以及是否允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信,并向第二接入网设备发送请求消息的响应消息,具体可以参见下述情形一至情形三。The first access network device may determine whether the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration according to the identifier of the terminal device included in the request message. If the terminal device does not use the default RLC configuration, then the subsequent implementation can refer to the prior art; if the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration, it can be determined whether to perform anchor point relocation, and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration and The terminal device communicates, and sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device. For details, refer to the following scenarios 1 to 3.
关于第一接入网设备确定是否执行锚点重定位,以及是否允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信的依据,本申请实施例不做限定。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the basis for the first access network device to determine whether to perform anchor relocation and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
作为一种可能的实现,第一接入网设备可以依据第二接入网设备的能力信息(此种情形下,请求消息包括第二接入网设备的能力信息),确定是否执行锚点重定位,以及是否允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。比如,若第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置,则第一接入网设备可以确定执行锚点重定位,并允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(参见下文的情形一);又比如,若第二接入网设备不支持默认RLC配置,则第一接入网设备可以确定不执行锚点重定位,并由第一接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(参见下文的情形二);又比如,若第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置,则第一接入网设备也可以确定不执行锚点重定位,并允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(参见下文的情形三)。As a possible implementation, the first access network device may determine whether to perform anchor point relocation according to the capability information of the second access network device (in this case, the request message includes the capability information of the second access network device). positioning, and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device. For example, if the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may determine to perform anchor relocation, and allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (see Situation 1); For another example, if the second access network device does not support the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may determine not to perform anchor relocation, and the first access network device uses the default RLC configuration and the terminal The devices communicate (see situation 2 below); for another example, if the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may also determine not to perform anchor relocation, and allow the second access network The device communicates with the end device using the default RLC configuration (see scenario three below).
作为一种可能的实现,第一接入网设备在确定是否执行锚点重定位,以及是否允许第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信,也可以不考虑第二接入网设备的能力信息(此种情形下,请求消息可以不包括第二接入网设备的能力信息)。比如,不论第二接入网设备是否支持默认RLC配置,第一接入网设备都可以确定不执行锚点重定位,并由第一接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(参见下文的情形二)。As a possible implementation, when the first access network device determines whether to perform anchor relocation and whether to allow the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device, the second access network device may not consider the Capability information of the device (in this case, the request message may not include capability information of the second access network device). For example, regardless of whether the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration, the first access network device may determine not to perform anchor relocation, and the first access network device uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (see Case 2 below).
下面结合情形一至情形三描述第一接入网设备接收到请求消息后的三种可能的实现。Three possible implementations after the first access network device receives the request message are described below in combination with the first to third situations.
情形一:参见图5A所示Scenario 1: See Figure 5A
S505-a,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送请求消息的响应消息,相应地,第二接入网设备可以接收响应消息。S505-a, the first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the response message.
此处,响应消息可以包括锚点重定位信息1、第二指示信息以及终端设备的上下文信息,上下文信息中包括终端设备的专用RLC配置。其中,锚点重定位信息1用于指示执行锚点重定位,第二指示信息指示第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。可以理解的是,第二指示信息所包括的内容可以和第一指示信息所包括的内容相同。Here, the response message may include anchor relocation information 1, second indication information, and context information of the terminal device, where the context information includes a dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device. Wherein, the anchor relocation information 1 is used to instruct to perform anchor relocation, and the second instruction information instructs the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device. It can be understood that the content included in the second indication information may be the same as the content included in the first indication information.
S506-a,第二接入网设备执行路径切换等操作。S506-a, the second access network device performs operations such as path switching.
S507-a,终端设备使用默认RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU2进行第一处理得到RLC PDU2,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU2,RLC PDU2包括上行数据。S507-a, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
可以理解的是,S507-a可以合并到上述S503中,也就是说,在S503中终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1和RLC PDU2。It can be understood that S507-a can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
S508-a,第二接入网设备接收到RLC PDU2后,使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2,进而解析得到上行数据。S508-a. After receiving the RLC PDU2, the second access network device performs second processing on the RLC PDU2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain PDCP PDU2, and then parses to obtain uplink data.
S509-a,第二接入网设备将上行数据发送给UPF网元。S509-a, the second access network device sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
S510-a,UPF网元向第二接入网设备发送下行数据,相应地,第二接入网设备接收下行数据。S510-a, the UPF network element sends downlink data to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device receives the downlink data.
S511-a,第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3。S511-a, the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3.
此处,第二接入网设备可以在从UPF网元接收下行数据后,使用默认RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3。或者,在路径切换之前,UPF网元也可能向第一接入网设备发送终端设备的下行数据,此种情形下,第一接入网设备可以根据第二接入网设备发送的地址指示信息,将包含下行数据的PDCP SDU3发送给第二接入网设备,进而,第二接入网设备可以在接收到包含下行数据的PDCP SDU3后,处理得到PDCP PDU3,进而使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3。Here, after receiving the downlink data from the UPF network element, the second access network device may use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3. Or, before path switching, the UPF network element may also send the downlink data of the terminal device to the first access network device. In this case, the first access network device may indicate the , send the PDCP SDU3 containing the downlink data to the second access network device, and then, the second access network device can process the PDCP PDU3 after receiving the PDCP SDU3 containing the downlink data, and then use the default RLC configuration to configure the PDCP PDU3 Perform the first processing to obtain RLC PDU3.
S512-a,第二接入网设备向终端设备发送RLC PDU3,RLC PDU3包括下行数据;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU3后,可以使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU3进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU3,进而解析得到下行数据。S512-a, the second access network device sends RLC PDU3 to the terminal device, and the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU3, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, Then analyze and obtain the downlink data.
S513-a,第二接入网设备生成第二RRC释放消息(例如,第二接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成时,生成第二RRC释放消息),并使用默认RLC配置对包含第二RRC释放消息的PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4,进而向终端设备发送RLC PDU4,RLC PDU4包括第二RRC释放消息;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU4后,可以使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU4进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU4,进而解析得到第二RRC释放消息,并根据第二RRC释放消息结束在非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。S513-a, the second access network device generates a second RRC release message (for example, the second access network device generates a second RRC release message when it determines that the data transmission is about to be completed), and uses the default RLC configuration pair to include the second RRC The PDCP PDU4 of the release message is first processed to obtain RLC PDU4, and then the RLC PDU4 is sent to the terminal device, and the RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform RLC PDU4 The second process obtains the PDCP PDU4, and then parses to obtain the second RRC release message, and ends the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and continues to maintain the inactive state.
可以理解的是,上述情形一中,终端设备和第二接入网设备在SDT过程中可以始终使用默认RLC配置进行通信。或者,在其它可能的实施例中,在SDT过程结束之前,第二接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示终端设备切换为使用专用RLC配置,则终端设备接收到第三指示信息后,可以切换为使用专用RLC配置。It can be understood that, in the above scenario 1, the terminal device and the second access network device may always use the default RLC configuration for communication during the SDT process. Or, in other possible embodiments, before the end of the SDT process, the second access network device may send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration, and the terminal device receives After receiving the third indication information, it may be switched to use the dedicated RLC configuration.
作为一种可能的实现,第三指示信息可以承载于RRC消息。此种情形下,第二接入 网设备可以使用默认RLC配置对包含RRC消息的PDCP PDU5进行第一处理得到RLC PDU5,并向终端设备发送RLC PDU5;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU5后,可以使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU5进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU5,并解析得到RRC消息,进而终端设备可以根据RRC消息中的第三指示信息切换为使用专用RLC配置,进而第二接入网设备和终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置继续进行数据传输。后续,第二接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成时,可以生成第二RRC释放消息,并使用专用RLC配置对包含第二RRC释放消息的PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4,进而向终端设备发送RLC PDU4,RLC PDU4包括第二RRC释放消息;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU4后,可以使用专用RLC配置对RLC PDU4进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU4,进而解析得到第二RRC释放消息,并根据第二RRC释放消息结束在非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。As a possible implementation, the third indication information may be carried in an RRC message. In this case, the second access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU5 containing the RRC message to obtain RLC PDU5, and send RLC PDU5 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after the terminal device receives RLC PDU5, The default RLC configuration can be used to perform second processing on RLC PDU5 to obtain PDCP PDU5, and the RRC message can be obtained by parsing, and then the terminal device can switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration according to the third indication information in the RRC message, and then the second access network device and End devices can continue data transmission using a dedicated RLC configuration. Subsequently, when the second access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate a second RRC release message, and use a dedicated RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain RLC PDU4, and then send the RLC PDU4 to the terminal device Send RLC PDU4, RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message; correspondingly, after receiving RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU4 to obtain PDCP PDU4, and then parse to obtain the second RRC release message, and End the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and keep in the inactive state.
在一个示例中,若终端设备向第二接入网设备发送了上行数据1,在接收上行数据1的反馈信息(反馈信息用于指示上行数据1是否被成功接收)之前,接收到了第三指示信息,由于终端设备尚未接收到上行数据1的反馈信息,无法确定上行数据1是否被成功接收,且终端设备切换为使用专用RLC配置后,即使接收到上行数据1的反馈信息可能也无法解析(比如接入网设备在发送第三指示信息之前,使用默认RLC配置发送了反馈信息),因此,终端设备可以使用专用RLC配置重传上行数据1。In an example, if the terminal device sends the uplink data 1 to the second access network device, before receiving the feedback information of the uplink data 1 (the feedback information is used to indicate whether the uplink data 1 is successfully received), the third indication is received information, since the terminal device has not received the feedback information of uplink data 1, it is impossible to determine whether the uplink data 1 has been successfully received, and after the terminal device switches to using a dedicated RLC configuration, it may not be able to parse even if it receives the feedback information of uplink data 1 ( For example, the access network device uses the default RLC configuration to send the feedback information before sending the third indication information), therefore, the terminal device can use the dedicated RLC configuration to retransmit the uplink data 1 .
作为又一种可能的实现,第三指示信息可以为RRC恢复消息,终端设备接收到RRC恢复消息后,可以转换到连接态,后续第二接入网设备和终端设备使用专用RLC配置进行通信。As yet another possible implementation, the third indication information may be an RRC recovery message. After receiving the RRC recovery message, the terminal device may switch to a connected state, and then the second access network device and the terminal device communicate using a dedicated RLC configuration.
情形二:参见图5B所示Scenario 2: See Figure 5B
S505-b,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送请求消息的响应消息,相应地,第二接入网设备可以接收响应消息,响应消息包括锚点重定位信息2,锚点重定位信息2用于指示不执行锚点重定位。S505-b. The first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device. Correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the response message. The response message includes anchor point relocation information 2, the anchor point Relocation information 2 is used to indicate that anchor point relocation is not performed.
示例性地,响应消息可以不包括终端设备的上下文信息。Exemplarily, the response message may not include context information of the terminal device.
S506-b,终端设备使用默认RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU2进行第一处理得到RLC PDU2,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU2,RLC PDU2包括上行数据。S506-b. The terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain the RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
可以理解的是,S506-b可以合并到上述S503中,也就是说,在S503中终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1和RLC PDU2。It can be understood that S506-b can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
S507-b,第二接入网设备接收RLC PDU2,并向第一接入网设备转发RLC PDU2。S507-b. The second access network device receives the RLC PDU2, and forwards the RLC PDU2 to the first access network device.
S508-b,第一接入网设备接收RLC PDU2,使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2,进而解析得到上行数据。S508-b. The first access network device receives the RLC PDU2, performs second processing on the RLC PDU2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain PDCP PDU2, and then parses to obtain uplink data.
S509-b,第一接入网设备将上行数据发送给UPF网元。S509-b. The first access network device sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
S510-b,UPF网元向第一接入网设备发送下行数据。S510-b. The UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device.
S511-b,第一接入网设备接收下行数据,并使用默认RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3。S511-b. The first access network device receives the downlink data, and uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain RLC PDU3.
S512-b,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送包括RLC PDU3,RLC PDU3包括下行数据。S512-b. The first access network device sends an RLC PDU3 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data.
S513-b,第二接入网设备接收RLC PDU3,并向终端设备转发RLC PDU3;相应地, 终端设备可以接收RLC PDU3,并使用默认配置对RLC PDU3进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU3,进而解析得到下行数据。S513-b, the second access network device receives RLC PDU3, and forwards RLC PDU3 to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device can receive RLC PDU3, and use the default configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
S514-b,第一接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成时,可以生成第二RRC释放消息,并使用默认RLC配置对包含第二RRC释放消息的PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU4,RLC PDU4包含第二RRC释放消息。S514-b. When the first access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate a second RRC release message, and use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain RLC PDU4, and then send The second access network device sends RLC PDU4, and RLC PDU4 includes the second RRC release message.
S515-b,第二接入网设备接收RLC PDU4,并向终端设备转发RLC PDU4;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU4后,可以使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU4进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU4,进而解析得到第二RRC释放消息,并根据第二RRC释放消息结束在非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。S515-b, the second access network device receives the RLC PDU4, and forwards the RLC PDU4 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU4 to obtain a PDCP PDU4, and then The second RRC release message is obtained by parsing, and the data transmission in the inactive state is ended according to the second RRC release message and kept in the inactive state.
可以理解的是,上述情形二中,终端设备和第一接入网设备在SDT过程中可以始终使用默认RLC配置进行通信。在其它可能的实施例中,在SDT过程结束之前,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息指示终端设备切换为使用专用RLC配置,则终端设备接收到第三指示信息后,可以切换为使用专用RLC配置。比如,第三指示信息可以承载于RRC消息,具体参见上述情形一中的描述。It can be understood that, in the second scenario above, the terminal device and the first access network device may always use the default RLC configuration for communication during the SDT process. In other possible embodiments, before the end of the SDT process, the first access network device may send third indication information to the terminal device, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using a dedicated RLC configuration, and the terminal device receives the first After three instructions, you can switch to using dedicated RLC configuration. For example, the third indication information may be carried in an RRC message, and for details, refer to the description in the first scenario above.
情形三:参见图5C所示Scenario 3: See Figure 5C
S505-c,第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送请求消息的响应消息,相应地,第二接入网设备可以接收响应消息。其中,响应消息包括锚点重定位信息2和第二指示信息,锚点重定位信息2用于指示不执行锚点重定位,第二指示信息指示第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。S505-c, the first access network device sends a response message to the request message to the second access network device, and correspondingly, the second access network device may receive the response message. Wherein, the response message includes anchor relocation information 2 and second indication information, where the anchor relocation information 2 is used to indicate that anchor relocation is not performed, and the second indication information indicates that the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration and the terminal devices to communicate.
此处,响应消息还可以包括终端设备的上下文信息,上下文信息中不包括终端设备的部分或全部专用RLC配置。比如,当第一指示信息对应上行传输方向时,上下文信息中可以不包括上行传输对应的专用RLC配置。又比如,当第一指示信息对应M个RLC层实体时,上下文信息中可以不包括M个RLC层实体对应的专用RLC配置。Here, the response message may also include context information of the terminal device, and the context information does not include part or all of the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device. For example, when the first indication information corresponds to the uplink transmission direction, the dedicated RLC configuration corresponding to the uplink transmission may not be included in the context information. For another example, when the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities, the context information may not include dedicated RLC configurations corresponding to the M RLC layer entities.
S506-c,终端设备使用默认RLC配置对包含上行数据的PDCP PDU2进行第一处理得到RLC PDU2,进而向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU2,RLC PDU2包括上行数据。S506-c, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration to first process the PDCP PDU2 containing the uplink data to obtain RLC PDU2, and then sends the RLC PDU2 to the second access network device, and the RLC PDU2 includes the uplink data.
可以理解的是,S506-c可以合并到上述S503中,也就是说,在S503中终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU1和RLC PDU2。It can be understood that S506-c can be combined into the above S503, that is, in S503, the terminal device can send RLC PDU1 and RLC PDU2 to the second access network device.
S507-c,第二接入网设备接收到RLC PDU2后,使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2。S507-c. After receiving the RLC PDU2, the second access network device uses the default RLC configuration to perform a second process on the RLC PDU2 to obtain a PDCP PDU2.
S508-c,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送PDCP PDU2。S508-c. The second access network device sends PDCP PDU2 to the first access network device.
S509-c,第一接入网设备接收PDCP PDU2,并从PDCP PDU2中解析得到上行数据,进而将上行数据发送给UPF网元。S509-c. The first access network device receives the PDCP PDU2, parses the PDCP PDU2 to obtain uplink data, and then sends the uplink data to the UPF network element.
S510-c,UPF网元向第一接入网设备发送下行数据。S510-c, the UPF network element sends downlink data to the first access network device.
S511-c,第一接入网设备接收下行数据,并向第二接入网设备发送PDCP PDU3,PDCP PDU3包括下行数据。S511-c. The first access network device receives the downlink data, and sends PDCP PDU3 to the second access network device, where the PDCP PDU3 includes the downlink data.
S512-c,第二接入网设备接收PDCP PDU3,使用默认RLC配置对包含下行数据的PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3,并向终端设备发送RLC PDU3。S512-c. The second access network device receives the PDCP PDU3, uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU3 containing the downlink data to obtain the RLC PDU3, and sends the RLC PDU3 to the terminal device.
S513-c,第二接入网设备向终端设备发送RLC PDU3,RLC PDU3包括下行数据。相应地,终端设备可以接收RLC PDU3,并使用默认配置对RLC PDU3进行第二处理得到 PDCP PDU3,进而解析得到下行数据。S513-c. The second access network device sends an RLC PDU3 to the terminal device, where the RLC PDU3 includes downlink data. Correspondingly, the terminal device can receive RLC PDU3, and use the default configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU3 to obtain PDCP PDU3, and then parse to obtain downlink data.
S514-c,第一接入网设备确定数据传输即将完成后,可以生成第二RRC释放消息,并向第二接入网设备发送PDCP PDU4,PDCP PDU4包括第二RRC释放消息。S514-c. After the first access network device determines that the data transmission is about to be completed, it may generate a second RRC release message, and send a PDCP PDU4 to the second access network device, where the PDCP PDU4 includes the second RRC release message.
S515-c,第二接入网设备接收PDCP PDU4,使用默认RLC配置对包含第二RRC释放消息的PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4。S515-c. The second access network device receives the PDCP PDU4, and uses the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on the PDCP PDU4 including the second RRC release message to obtain the RLC PDU4.
S516-c,第二接入网设备向终端设备发送RLC PDU4;相应地,终端设备接收到RLC PDU4后,可以使用默认RLC配置对包含第二RRC释放消息的RLC PDU4进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU4,进而解析得到第二RRC释放消息,并根据第二RRC释放消息结束在非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在非激活态。S516-c, the second access network device sends RLC PDU4 to the terminal device; correspondingly, after receiving the RLC PDU4, the terminal device can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on the RLC PDU4 containing the second RRC release message to obtain PDCP PDU4 , and then analyze and obtain the second RRC release message, and end the data transmission in the inactive state according to the second RRC release message and continue to maintain the inactive state.
针对于上述情形二和情形三,可以理解的是:针对于上行传输,在情形二中,由于第一接入网设备未指示第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备通信(以及第一接入网设备发送给第二接入网设备的响应消息不包括终端设备的专用RLC配置),因此,当第一接入网设备从第二接入网设备接收到PDU后,可以获知该PDU为RLC PDU(即未经RLC层处理的PDU),并使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU进行处理得到PDCP PDU;在情形三中,由于第一接入网设备指示第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备通信,因此,当第一接入网设备从第二接入网设备接收到PDU后,可以获知该PDU为PDCP PDU(即经RLC层处理后的PDU)。下行传输可以参照上行传输,不再赘述。For the above-mentioned scenarios two and three, it can be understood that: for uplink transmission, in scenario two, since the first access network device does not instruct the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (and the second access network device The response message sent by an access network device to the second access network device does not include the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device), therefore, when the first access network device receives the PDU from the second access network device, it can know the The PDU is an RLC PDU (that is, a PDU that has not been processed by the RLC layer), and uses the default RLC configuration to process the RLC PDU to obtain a PDCP PDU; in case three, since the first access network device instructs the second access network device to use the default The RLC is configured to communicate with the terminal device. Therefore, when the first access network device receives the PDU from the second access network device, it can know that the PDU is a PDCP PDU (ie, a PDU processed by the RLC layer). For the downlink transmission, reference may be made to the uplink transmission, which will not be repeated here.
实施例二Embodiment two
图6为本申请实施例二提供的通信方法所对应的流程示意图,如图6所示,包括:FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application, as shown in FIG. 6 , including:
S601,终端设备确定使用默认RLC配置。S601. The terminal device determines to use a default RLC configuration.
示例性地,当终端设备需要发起SDT过程(为便于描述,称为第二SDT过程)时,可以确定在第二SDT过程中是否使用默认RLC配置。Exemplarily, when the terminal device needs to initiate an SDT process (for ease of description, referred to as a second SDT process), it may be determined whether to use the default RLC configuration in the second SDT process.
作为一种可能的实现,终端设备可以根据第一接入网设备和/或第二接入网设备的能力信息,确定是否使用默认RLC配置;其中,第一接入网设备的能力信息用于指示第一接入网设备是否支持默认RLC配置,第二接入网设备的能力信息用于指示第二接入网设备是否支持默认RLC配置。比如,当第一接入网设备和/或第二接入网设备支持默认RLC配置时,终端设备可以确定使用默认RLC配置,并向第二接入网设备发送第一上行信息。As a possible implementation, the terminal device may determine whether to use the default RLC configuration according to the capability information of the first access network device and/or the second access network device; wherein, the capability information of the first access network device is used for Indicating whether the first access network device supports the default RLC configuration, and the capability information of the second access network device is used to indicate whether the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration. For example, when the first access network device and/or the second access network device support the default RLC configuration, the terminal device may determine to use the default RLC configuration, and send the first uplink information to the second access network device.
终端设备获取第一接入网设备的能力信息的方式可以有多种,比如终端设备可以接收第一接入网设备的***消息,***消息中包括第一接入网设备的能力信息。终端设备获取第二接入网设备的能力信息的方式可以参见实施例一。There are many ways for the terminal device to obtain the capability information of the first access network device. For example, the terminal device may receive a system message of the first access network device, and the system message includes the capability information of the first access network device. For the manner in which the terminal device acquires the capability information of the second access network device, refer to Embodiment 1.
S602,终端设备通知第二接入网设备:终端设备使用默认RLC配置。S602. The terminal device notifies the second access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
示例性地,若终端设备在SDT过程中通知第二接入网设备,则表示终端设备在该SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置;否则,表示终端设备在通知第二接入网设备之后的首次SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置。也就是说,终端设备可以通知第二接入网设备:终端设备在第二SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置;其中,第二SDT过程可以为终端设备通知第二接入网设备时的当前SDT过程,或者也可以为终端设备通知第二接入网设备之后的首次SDT过程。Exemplarily, if the terminal device notifies the second access network device during the SDT process, it means that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration during the SDT process; otherwise, it means that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration after notifying the second access network device. The default RLC configuration is used in the process. That is to say, the terminal device may notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the second SDT process; wherein, the second SDT process may be the current SDT process when the terminal device notifies the second access network device , or the terminal device may also be notified of the first SDT process after the second access network device.
终端设备通知第二接入网设备的方式可以有多种,下面结合实现方式1至实现方式3描述三种可能的实现。There may be multiple manners for the terminal device to notify the second access network device, and three possible implementations are described below in conjunction with Implementation Mode 1 to Implementation Mode 3.
(1)实现方式1(1) Implementation method 1
在实现方式1中,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送第一通知信息,第一通知信息用于通知第二接入网设备:终端设备使用默认RLC配置。In implementation manner 1, the terminal device sends first notification information to the second access network device, where the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
终端设备向第二接入网设备发送第一通知信息的方式可以有多种,比如终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU5,RLC PDU5包括RRC恢复请求消息,第一通知信息承载于RRC恢复请求消息。RLC PDU5是使用默认RLC配置处理得到的。又比如,第一通知信息也承载于SRB1,或者第一通知信息也可以承载于MAC CE,具体不做限定。There are many ways for the terminal device to send the first notification information to the second access network device. For example, the terminal device may send RLC PDU5 to the second access network device. The RLC PDU5 includes an RRC recovery request message, and the first notification information is carried in RRC recovery request message. RLC PDU5 is processed using the default RLC configuration. For another example, the first notification information is also borne by SRB1, or the first notification information may also be borne by the MAC CE, which is not specifically limited.
①作为一种可能的实现,第一通知信息可以对应N个RLC层实体,此种情形下,第一通知信息用于通知第二接入网设备:终端设备的N个RLC层实体使用默认RLC配置。其中,N为正整数。① As a possible implementation, the first notification information may correspond to N RLC layer entities. In this case, the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the N RLC layer entities of the terminal device use the default RLC configuration. Wherein, N is a positive integer.
其中,N个RLC层实体可以是协议预先约定的。或者,终端设备可以向第二接入网设备发送第四信息,第四信息用于确定N个RLC层实体。可以理解地,第一通知信息可以包括第四信息;或者,第一通知信息不包括第四信息,此种情形下,终端设备向第二接入网设备发送第四信息的方式可以和终端设备向第二接入网设备发送第一通知信息的方式相同,比如第四信息和第一通知信息可以承载于同一消息。Wherein, the N RLC layer entities may be pre-agreed in the protocol. Alternatively, the terminal device may send fourth information to the second access network device, where the fourth information is used to determine N RLC layer entities. It can be understood that the first notification information may include the fourth information; or, the first notification information may not include the fourth information, in this case, the method for the terminal device to send the fourth information to the second access network device may be the same as that of the terminal device The manner of sending the first notification information to the second access network device is the same, for example, the fourth information and the first notification information may be carried in the same message.
比如,第四信息可以包括一个或多个无线承载的标识,则N个RLC层实体为该一个或多个无线承载对应的RLC层实体。又比如,第四信息可以指示一种或多种传输模式,则N个RLC层实体可以为使用该一种或多种传输模式的RLC层实体。For example, the fourth information may include identifiers of one or more radio bearers, and the N RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the one or more radio bearers. For another example, the fourth information may indicate one or more transmission modes, and the N RLC layer entities may be RLC layer entities using the one or more transmission modes.
②作为又一种可能的实现,第一通知信息可以对应第二传输方向,此种情形下,第一通知信息用于通知第二接入网设备:终端设备在第二传输方向上使用默认RLC配置。②As yet another possible implementation, the first notification information may correspond to the second transmission direction. In this case, the first notification information is used to notify the second access network device that the terminal device uses the default RLC in the second transmission direction. configuration.
其中,第二传输方向可以协议预先约定的。或者,第一接入网设备可以向终端设备发送第五信息,第五信息用于确定第二传输方向。可以理解地,第一通知信息可以包括第五信息;或者,第一通知信息不包括第五信息,此种情形下,第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第五信息的方式可以和第一接入网设备向终端设备发送第一通知信息的方式相同,比如第五信息和第一通知信息可以承载于同一消息。Wherein, the second transmission direction may be pre-agreed by agreement. Alternatively, the first access network device may send fifth information to the terminal device, where the fifth information is used to determine the second transmission direction. It can be understood that the first notification information may include the fifth information; or, the first notification information does not include the fifth information, in this case, the way the first access network device sends the fifth information to the terminal device may be the same as the first The manner in which the access network device sends the first notification information to the terminal device is the same, for example, the fifth information and the first notification information may be carried in the same message.
本申请实施例中,将以“第一通知信息对应N个RLC层实体和第二传输方向,其中,N个RLC层实体为终端设备在第二SDT过程中所涉及的所有RLC层实体,第二传输方向包括上行传输方向和下行传输方向”为例进行描述。In the embodiment of this application, "the first notification information corresponds to N RLC layer entities and the second transmission direction, wherein, the N RLC layer entities are all RLC layer entities involved in the second SDT process of the terminal device, and the first The two transmission directions include the uplink transmission direction and the downlink transmission direction" as an example for description.
(2)实现方式2(2) Implementation method 2
在一个示例中,终端设备可以接收第二接入网设备发送的***消息。***消息中可以包括默认RLC配置对应的PRACH资源和/或默认RLC配置对应的前导码,PRACH资源用于承载前导码。进而,当终端设备确定使用默认RLC配置后,可以向第二接入网设备发送四步随机接入过程的Msg1。Msg1所包括的前导码为默认RLC配置对应的前导码,和/或,承载Msg1所包括的前导码的PRACH资源可以为默认RLC配置对应的PRACH资源。相应地,第二接入网设备接收到Msg1后,可以获知:终端设备使用默认RLC配置(比如终端设备在当前SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置)。In an example, the terminal device may receive the system message sent by the second access network device. The system message may include a PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration and/or a preamble corresponding to the default RLC configuration, and the PRACH resource is used to bear the preamble. Further, after the terminal device determines to use the default RLC configuration, it may send the Msg1 of the four-step random access procedure to the second access network device. The preamble included in Msg1 is the preamble corresponding to the default RLC configuration, and/or, the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in Msg1 may be the PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration. Correspondingly, after receiving the Msg1, the second access network device may know that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration (for example, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the current SDT process).
在又一个示例中,终端设备可以接收第二接入网设备发送的***消息。***消息中可以包括以下至少一项:默认RLC配置对应的PRACH资源、默认RLC配置对应的前导码、默认RLC配置对应的PUSCH资源。进而,当终端设备确定使用默认RLC配置后,可以向第二接入网设备发送两步随机接入过程的MsgA。其中,MsgA符合以下至少一项:MsgA 所包括的前导码可以为默认RLC配置对应的前导码、承载MsgA所包括的前导码的PRACH资源可以为默认RLC配置对应的PRACH资源、MsgA所包括的上行数据承载于默认RLC配置对应的PUSCH资源。相应地,第二接入网设备接收到MsgA后,可以获知:终端设备使用默认RLC配置(比如终端设备在当前SDT过程中使用默认RLC配置)。In yet another example, the terminal device may receive the system message sent by the second access network device. The system message may include at least one of the following: PRACH resources corresponding to the default RLC configuration, preambles corresponding to the default RLC configuration, and PUSCH resources corresponding to the default RLC configuration. Furthermore, after the terminal device determines to use the default RLC configuration, it may send the MsgA of the two-step random access procedure to the second access network device. Among them, MsgA meets at least one of the following: the preamble included in MsgA can be the corresponding preamble of the default RLC configuration; the PRACH resource carrying the preamble included in MsgA can be the PRACH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration; The data is carried on the PUSCH resource corresponding to the default RLC configuration. Correspondingly, after receiving the MsgA, the second access network device may know that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration (for example, the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration in the current SDT process).
(3)实现方式3(3) Implementation method 3
终端设备向第二接入网设备发送RLC PDU6,RLC PDU6对应的逻辑信道为默认RLC配置对应的逻辑信道,则第二接入网设备可以获知:终端设备使用默认RLC配置。比如,RLC PDU6可以包括RRC恢复请求消息和/或上行数据。其中,默认RLC配置对应的逻辑信道可以为协议预先约定的,或者也可以是第二接入网设备配置的,比如终端设备接收第二接入网设备发送的***消息,***消息中包括默认RLC配置对应的逻辑信道标识。The terminal device sends RLC PDU6 to the second access network device, and the logical channel corresponding to the RLC PDU6 is the logical channel corresponding to the default RLC configuration, then the second access network device can learn that the terminal device uses the default RLC configuration. For example, RLC PDU6 may include an RRC recovery request message and/or uplink data. Wherein, the logical channel corresponding to the default RLC configuration may be pre-agreed by the protocol, or may be configured by the second access network device. For example, the terminal device receives the system message sent by the second access network device, and the system message includes the default RLC channel. Configure the corresponding logical channel ID.
可以理解的是,上述实现方式1中,终端设备是通过显式的方式来通知第二接入网设备,实现方式2和实现方式3中终端设备是通过隐式的方式来通知第二接入网设备。It can be understood that, in the above implementation mode 1, the terminal device notifies the second access network device in an explicit way, and in the implementation mode 2 and implementation mode 3, the terminal device notifies the second access network device in an implicit way network equipment.
S603,第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送请求消息,请求消息用于请求终端设备的上下文信息,请求消息可以包括终端设备的标识;相应地,第一接入网设备接收请求消息。S603, the second access network device sends a request message to the first access network device, the request message is used to request the context information of the terminal device, and the request message may include the identifier of the terminal device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the request information.
此处,请求消息还可以包括第二通知信息,第二通知信息用于通知第一接入网设备:终端设备使用默认RLC配置。可选地,请求消息还可以包括其它可能的信息,比如请求消息还可以包括第二接入网设备的能力信息,又比如请求消息还可以包括实施例一中所描述的信息a或信息b。Here, the request message may further include second notification information, and the second notification information is used to notify the first access network device that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration. Optionally, the request message may also include other possible information, for example, the request message may also include capability information of the second access network device, and for example, the request message may also include information a or information b described in Embodiment 1.
可以理解的是,在其它可能的实施例中,第二通知信息也可以承载于其它可能的消息,具体不做限定。It can be understood that, in other possible embodiments, the second notification information may also be carried in other possible messages, which is not specifically limited.
第一接入网设备接收到请求消息之后的流程可以参见实施例一。For the process after the first access network device receives the request message, refer to Embodiment 1.
采用上述实施例一或实施例二中的方案,终端设备可以在非激活态下与接入网设备进行数据传输,而无需转换到连接态再进行数据传输,从而能够有效降低终端设备的功耗和信令开销。此外,本申请实施例通过在接入网设备侧和终端设备侧引入默认RLC配置,使得终端设备与接入网设备可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT,比如终端设备从第一接入网设备的覆盖区域移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,终端设备与接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备)可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT,从而便于降低第一接入网设备与第二接入网设备之间的信令开销(比如在上述情形二或情形三中,第一接入网设备无需向第二接入网设备发送SDT所需要的RLC配置),提高终端设备在非激活态下的数据传输效率。By adopting the solution in the above-mentioned embodiment 1 or embodiment 2, the terminal device can perform data transmission with the access network device in the inactive state without switching to the connected state for data transmission, thereby effectively reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and signaling overhead. In addition, the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and the access network device can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, such as the coverage of the terminal device from the first access network device After the area moves to the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and the access network device (such as the first access network device or the second access network device) can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, thereby reducing the first Signaling overhead between the access network device and the second access network device (for example, in the above scenario 2 or 3, the first access network device does not need to send the RLC configuration required by SDT to the second access network device) , improving the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
上述实施例一或实施例二中,是将接入网设备(比如第一接入网设备、第二接入网设备)作为一个整体进行描述的,参见前文有关接入网设备的描述可知,接入网设备也可以包括分离的节点,比如参见图2B所示。In Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 2 above, the access network device (such as the first access network device and the second access network device) is described as a whole, as can be seen from the previous description of the access network device, The access network device may also include separate nodes, as shown in FIG. 2B , for example.
下面将基于上述图2B所示意的分离架构,结合实施例三和实施例四对接入网设备所包括的CU和DU之间的交互进行描述。The following will describe the interaction between the CU and the DU included in the access network device based on the above-mentioned separation architecture shown in FIG. 2B in combination with Embodiment 3 and Embodiment 4.
实施例三Embodiment three
在实施例三中,第一接入网设备可以包括CU-1和DU-1。In Embodiment 3, the first access network device may include CU-1 and DU-1.
(1)针对于上述实施例一,当第一接入网设备包括CU-1和DU-1时,则可以由CU-1 确定第一指示信息,或者也可以由DU-1确定第一指示信息。(1) For the first embodiment above, when the first access network device includes CU-1 and DU-1, the first indication information can be determined by CU-1, or the first indication can also be determined by DU-1 information.
实现方式1:由CU-1确定第一指示信息Implementation 1: CU-1 determines the first indication information
图7为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图,如图7所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 7 is a schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7, the method includes the following steps:
S701,CU-1确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置。S701. The CU-1 determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used.
S702,CU-1向DU-1发送第一指示信息;相应地,DU-1可以接收第一指示信息。S702, CU-1 sends first indication information to DU-1; correspondingly, DU-1 may receive the first indication information.
示例性地,CU-1向DU-1发送F1接口消息,F1接口消息包括第一指示信息。Exemplarily, CU-1 sends an F1 interface message to DU-1, and the F1 interface message includes first indication information.
示例性地,CU-1存储有终端设备的上下文信息,CU-1还可以向DU-1发送终端设备的上下文信息,上下文信息中不包括终端设备的部分或全部专用RLC配置。比如,当第一指示信息对应上行传输方向时,上下文信息中可以不包括上行传输对应的专用RLC配置。又比如,当第一指示信息对应M个RLC层实体时,上下文信息中可以不包括M个RLC层实体对应的专用RLC配置。可以理解的是,在其它可能的实施例中,DU可以存储有终端设备的专用RLC配置,此种情形下,CU-1可以无需向DU-1发送上下文信息。Exemplarily, CU-1 stores the context information of the terminal device, and CU-1 may also send the context information of the terminal device to DU-1, and the context information does not include some or all dedicated RLC configurations of the terminal device. For example, when the first indication information corresponds to the uplink transmission direction, the dedicated RLC configuration corresponding to the uplink transmission may not be included in the context information. For another example, when the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities, the context information may not include dedicated RLC configurations corresponding to the M RLC layer entities. It can be understood that, in other possible embodiments, the DU may store the dedicated RLC configuration of the terminal device, and in this case, the CU-1 may not need to send the context information to the DU-1.
此处,CU-1向DU-1发送第一指示信息,以便于后续DU-1使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。比如在上述实施例一的情形二中,可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2,以及可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3,还可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4。Here, the CU-1 sends the first indication information to the DU-1, so that the subsequent DU-1 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device. For example, in case 2 of the first embodiment above, DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2, and DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU3 to obtain RLC PDU3 can also be obtained by DU-1 using the default RLC configuration to first process PDCP PDU4 to obtain RLC PDU4.
S703,CU-1向终端设备或第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息。S703. The CU-1 sends the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
示例性地,CU-1向终端设备或第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息的方式可以有多种。Exemplarily, there may be multiple manners for the CU-1 to send the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
作为一种可能的实现,CU-1通过DU-1向终端设备发送第一RRC释放消息,第一RRC释放消息用于指示终端设备进入非激活态,第一RRC释放消息包括第一指示信息。As a possible implementation, the CU-1 sends a first RRC release message to the terminal device through the DU-1, the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information.
作为一种可能的实现,CU-1从核心网设备接收到终端设备(此时终端设备处于非激活态)的下行数据,需要将下行数据发送给终端设备,则CU-1可以在为终端设备配置的RNA内寻呼终端设备。比如,CU-1向第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,第一寻呼消息用于指示第二接入网设备寻呼处于非激活态的终端设备,第一寻呼消息包括第一指示信息。相应地,第二接入网设备接收到第一寻呼消息后,可以在第二接入网设备的小区内发送第二寻呼消息,第二寻呼消息用于寻呼终端设备,第二寻呼消息包括第一指示信息和终端设备的标识。以及,CU-1还可以通过DU-1发送第三寻呼消息,第三寻呼消息用于寻呼终端设备,第三寻呼消息包括第一指示信息和终端设备的标识。若终端设备在第二接入网设备的小区内,则终端设备可以接收第二寻呼消息,并从第二寻呼消息中获取第一指示信息;若终端设备在DU-1的小区内,则终端设备可以接收第三寻呼消息,并从第三寻呼消息中获取第一指示信息。As a possible implementation, CU-1 receives the downlink data of the terminal device (the terminal device is in an inactive state) from the core network device, and needs to send the downlink data to the terminal device, then CU-1 can serve as the terminal device Configure the paging end-device within the RNA. For example, CU-1 sends a first paging message to the second access network device, the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device in the inactive state, and the first paging message includes the first 1. Instructions. Correspondingly, after receiving the first paging message, the second access network device may send a second paging message in the cell of the second access network device, the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the second paging message is used for paging the terminal device. The paging message includes first indication information and an identifier of the terminal device. And, CU-1 may also send a third paging message through DU-1, the third paging message is used for paging the terminal device, and the third paging message includes the first indication information and the identifier of the terminal device. If the terminal device is in the cell of the second access network device, the terminal device can receive the second paging message, and obtain the first indication information from the second paging message; if the terminal device is in the cell of DU-1, Then the terminal device may receive the third paging message, and acquire the first indication information from the third paging message.
可以理解的是,上述S702为可选步骤,比如在一个示例中,CU-1确定第一指示信息后,可以先执行S703,后续CU-1接收到来自第二接入网设备的请求消息后,若确定DU-1需要使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(比如参见实施例一中的情形二),则可以向DU-1发送第一指示信息;若确定DU-1不需要使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(比如参见实施例一中的情形一或情形三),则可以不向DU-1发送第一指示信息。或者,CU-1确定第一指示信息后,便可以向DU-1发送第一指示信息,无需考虑后续DU-1是否需要 使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。It can be understood that the above S702 is an optional step. For example, in an example, after CU-1 determines the first indication information, S703 may be executed first, and then after CU-1 receives the request message from the second access network device , if it is determined that DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (for example, refer to situation 2 in Embodiment 1), the first indication information may be sent to DU-1; if it is determined that DU-1 does not need to use the default RLC It is configured to communicate with the terminal device (for example, refer to situation 1 or situation 3 in Embodiment 1), then the first indication information may not be sent to DU-1. Or, after determining the first indication information, CU-1 may send the first indication information to DU-1 without considering whether subsequent DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
采用上述方式,第一接入网设备包括CU-1和DU-1,CU-1在确定第一指示信息后,便可以通过第一RRC释放消息向终端设备发送第一指示信息,或通过第一寻呼消息向第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息,从而能够实现快速地向终端设备或第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息。此外,由于CU还可以向DU-1发送第一指示信息,从而使得终端设备与DU-1可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT(比如上述情形三),且CU-1无需向第二接入网设备发送SDT所需要的RLC配置,提高终端设备在非激活态下的数据传输效率。Using the above method, the first access network device includes CU-1 and DU-1. After CU-1 determines the first indication information, it can send the first indication information to the terminal device through the first RRC release message, or through the second A paging message sends the first indication information to the second access network device, so that the first indication information can be quickly sent to the terminal device or the second access network device. In addition, since the CU can also send the first indication information to the DU-1, the terminal device and the DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT (such as the above scenario three), and the CU-1 does not need to send the second access network device Send the RLC configuration required by the SDT to improve the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
实现方式2:由DU-1确定第一指示信息Implementation 2: DU-1 determines the first indication information
图8为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的又一种流程示意图,如图8所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 8 is another schematic flow diagram corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the method includes the following steps:
S801,DU-1确定第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置。S801. The DU-1 determines first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, a default RLC configuration is used.
示例性地,CU-1可以向DU-1发送请求消息,请求消息用于请求是否允许终端设备使用默认RLC配置;相应地,DU-1接收到请求消息后,可以判断是否允许终端设备使用默认RLC配置,若允许,则可以确定第一指示信息。其中,DU-1判断是否允许终端设备使用默认RLC配置依据可以有多种,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Exemplarily, CU-1 can send a request message to DU-1, and the request message is used to request whether to allow the terminal device to use the default RLC configuration; correspondingly, after receiving the request message, DU-1 can determine whether to allow the terminal device to use the default RLC configuration. The RLC configuration, if allowed, may determine the first indication information. There may be various bases for the DU-1 to determine whether to allow the terminal device to use the default RLC configuration, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
比如,CU-1可以在确定需要向终端设备发送第一RRC释放消息(用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态),且允许终端设备发起SDT过程后,向DU-1发送请求消息。又比如,CU-1可以在从UPF网元接收到终端设备的下行数据,且允许终端设备发起SDT过程后,向DU-1发送请求消息。For example, CU-1 may send a request message to DU-1 after determining that it is necessary to send the first RRC release message (for instructing the terminal device to enter the inactive state) to the terminal device and allowing the terminal device to initiate the SDT process. For another example, CU-1 may send a request message to DU-1 after receiving the downlink data of the terminal device from the UPF network element and allowing the terminal device to initiate the SDT process.
S802,DU-1向CU-1发送第一指示信息。S802, DU-1 sends first indication information to CU-1.
示例性地,DU-1可以向CU-1发送F1接口消息,F1接口消息包括第一指示信息。Exemplarily, DU-1 may send an F1 interface message to CU-1, where the F1 interface message includes the first indication information.
S803,CU-1向终端设备或第二接入网设备发送第一指示信息。S803. The CU-1 sends the first indication information to the terminal device or the second access network device.
示例性地,S803的具体实现可以参见S703。Exemplarily, for the specific implementation of S803, reference may be made to S703.
(2)针对于上述实施例二,CU-1可以接收来自第二接入网设备的第二通知信息。(2) For the second embodiment above, the CU-1 may receive the second notification information from the second access network device.
图9为本申请实施例三提供的通信方法所对应的又一种流程示意图,如图9所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the method includes the following steps:
S901,CU-1接收来自第二接入网设备的第二通知信息,第二通知信息用于通知:终端设备使用默认RLC配置。S901. The CU-1 receives second notification information from the second access network device, where the second notification information is used to notify that the terminal device uses a default RLC configuration.
S902,CU-1向DU-1发送第二通知信息。S902, CU-1 sends second notification information to DU-1.
示例性地,CU-1向DU-1发送F1接口消息,F1接口消息包括第二通知信息。Exemplarily, CU-1 sends an F1 interface message to DU-1, and the F1 interface message includes the second notification information.
此处,CU-1向DU-1发送第二通知信息,以便于后续DU-1使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。比如在上述实施例一的情形二中,可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2,以及可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3,还可以由DU-1使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4。Here, the CU-1 sends the second notification information to the DU-1, so that the subsequent DU-1 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device. For example, in case 2 of the first embodiment above, DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2, and DU-1 can use the default RLC configuration to perform first processing on PDCP PDU3 to obtain RLC PDU3 can also be obtained by DU-1 using the default RLC configuration to first process PDCP PDU4 to obtain RLC PDU4.
可以理解的是,上述S902为可选步骤,比如在一个示例中,CU-1接收到来自第二接入网设备的第二通知信息后,若确定DU-1需要使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(比如参见实施例一中的情形二),则可以向DU-1发送第二通知信息;若确定DU-1不需要使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信(比如参见实施例一中的情形一或情形三),则可以 不向DU-1发送第二通知信息。或者,CU-1接收到来自第二接入网设备的第二通知信息后,便可以向DU-1发送第二通知信息,无需考虑后续DU-1是否需要使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。It can be understood that the above S902 is an optional step. For example, in an example, after CU-1 receives the second notification information from the second access network device, if it is determined that DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration and terminal device To communicate (for example, see situation two in the first embodiment), you can send the second notification information to DU-1; if it is determined that DU-1 does not need to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device (for example, see the second notification in the first embodiment) Situation 1 or Situation 3), the second notification information may not be sent to DU-1. Or, after CU-1 receives the second notification information from the second access network device, it can send the second notification information to DU-1 without considering whether the subsequent DU-1 needs to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device .
实施例四Embodiment Four
在实施例四中,第二接入网设备可以包括CU-2和DU-2。In Embodiment 4, the second access network device may include CU-2 and DU-2.
针对于上述实施例一或实施例二,CU-2可以接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息。Regarding the first or second embodiment above, the CU-2 may receive the second indication information from the first access network device.
图10为本申请实施例四提供的通信方法所对应的一种流程示意图,如图10所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart corresponding to the communication method provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the method includes the following steps:
S1001,CU-2接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息。S1001. The CU-2 receives second indication information from the first access network device.
S1002,CU-2向DU-2发送第二指示信息。S1002. CU-2 sends second indication information to DU-2.
示例性地,CU-2向DU-2发送F1接口消息,F1接口消息包括第二指示信息。Exemplarily, CU-2 sends an F1 interface message to DU-2, and the F1 interface message includes the second indication information.
此处,CU-2向DU-2发送第二指示信息,以便于后续DU-2使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信。比如在上述实施例一的情形一或情形三中,可以由DU-2使用默认RLC配置对RLC PDU2进行第二处理得到PDCP PDU2,以及可以由DU-2使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU3进行第一处理得到RLC PDU3,还可以由DU-2使用默认RLC配置对PDCP PDU4进行第一处理得到RLC PDU4。Here, the CU-2 sends the second indication information to the DU-2, so that the subsequent DU-2 uses the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device. For example, in case 1 or case 3 of the first embodiment above, DU-2 can use the default RLC configuration to perform the second processing on RLC PDU2 to obtain PDCP PDU2, and DU-2 can use the default RLC configuration to perform the first processing on PDCP PDU3. The RLC PDU3 is obtained by processing, and the PDCP PDU4 can also be processed first by the DU-2 using the default RLC configuration to obtain the RLC PDU4.
采用上述实施例三或实施例四中的方案,当接入网设备采用CU-DU分离架构时,通过CU与DU之间的通信,使得终端设备可以在非激活态下与接入网设备进行数据传输,而无需转换到连接态再进行数据传输,从而能够有效降低终端设备的功耗和信令开销。此外,本申请实施例通过在接入网设备侧和终端设备侧引入默认RLC配置,使得终端设备与DU可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT,比如终端设备从第一接入网设备的覆盖区域移动至第二接入网设备的覆盖区域后,终端设备与DU(比如第一接入网设备的DU或第二接入网设备的DU)可以使用默认RLC配置进行SDT,从而便于降低第一接入网设备与第二接入网设备之间的信令开销(比如在上述情形二或情形三中,第一接入网设备的CU无需向第二接入网设备发送SDT所需要的RLC配置),提高终端设备在非激活态下的数据传输效率。By adopting the solution in Embodiment 3 or Embodiment 4 above, when the access network device adopts the CU-DU separation architecture, through the communication between the CU and the DU, the terminal device can communicate with the access network device in the inactive state. Data transmission without switching to the connected state for data transmission, which can effectively reduce the power consumption and signaling overhead of the terminal device. In addition, the embodiment of the present application introduces the default RLC configuration on the access network device side and the terminal device side, so that the terminal device and DU can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT. For example, the terminal device moves from the coverage area of the first access network device to After the coverage area of the second access network device, the terminal device and DU (such as the DU of the first access network device or the DU of the second access network device) can use the default RLC configuration to perform SDT, so as to facilitate the reduction of the first access network The signaling overhead between the network device and the second access network device (for example, in the above-mentioned scenario 2 or 3, the CU of the first access network device does not need to send the RLC configuration required by SDT to the second access network device) , improving the data transmission efficiency of the terminal device in the inactive state.
针对于上述实施例一至实施例四,可以理解的是:With regard to the above-mentioned embodiment 1 to embodiment 4, it can be understood that:
(1)实施例一至实施例四所描述的各个流程图的步骤编号仅为执行流程的一种示例,并不构成对步骤执行的先后顺序的限制,本申请实施例中相互之间没有时序依赖关系的步骤之间没有严格的执行顺序。各个流程图中所示意的步骤并非全部是必须执行的步骤,可以根据实际需要在各个流程图的基础上删除部分步骤,或者也可以根据实际需要在各个流程图的基础上增添其它可能的步骤。(1) The step numbers of the various flowcharts described in Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4 are only an example of the execution process, and do not constitute a restriction on the order of execution of the steps. There is no timing dependence between each other in the embodiments of the present application There is no strict order of execution among the steps of a relationship. Not all the steps illustrated in each flow chart are necessary steps, and some steps may be deleted on the basis of each flow chart according to actual needs, or other possible steps may be added on the basis of each flow chart according to actual needs.
(2)上述侧重描述了实施例一至实施例四中不同实施例之间的差异之处,除差异之处的其它内容,实施例一至实施例四之间可以相互参照;此外,同一实施例中,不同实现方式或不同示例之间也可以相互参照。(2) The above focuses on the differences between the different embodiments in Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4. Except for other content of the differences, Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 4 can be referred to each other; in addition, in the same embodiment , different implementations or different examples can also refer to each other.
上述主要从设备交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,为了实现上述功能,接入网设备或终端设备可以包括执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软 件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请的实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above functions, the access network device or the terminal device may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing various functions. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对接入网设备或终端设备进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。The embodiment of the present application can divide the functional units of the access network device or the terminal device according to the above method example, for example, each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one unit . The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,图11示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的装置的可能的示例性框图。如图11所示,装置1100可以包括:处理单元1102和通信单元1103。处理单元1102用于对装置1100的动作进行控制管理。通信单元1103用于支持装置1100与其他设备的通信。可选地,通信单元1103也称为收发单元,可以包括接收单元和/或发送单元,分别用于执行接收和发送操作。装置1100还可以包括存储单元1101,用于存储装置1100的程序代码和/或数据。In the case of using an integrated unit, FIG. 11 shows a possible exemplary block diagram of the device involved in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11 , an apparatus 1100 may include: a processing unit 1102 and a communication unit 1103 . The processing unit 1102 is used to control and manage the actions of the device 1100 . The communication unit 1103 is used to support the communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices. Optionally, the communication unit 1103 is also referred to as a transceiver unit, and may include a receiving unit and/or a sending unit, configured to perform receiving and sending operations respectively. The device 1100 may further include a storage unit 1101 for storing program codes and/or data of the device 1100 .
该装置1100可以为上述实施例中的第一接入网设备、或者还可以为设置在第一接入网设备中的芯片。处理单元1102可以支持装置1100执行上文中各方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中第一接入网设备的动作。或者,处理单元1102主要执行方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中的第一接入网设备的内部动作,通信单元1103可以支持装置1100与其它设备之间的通信。The apparatus 1100 may be the first access network device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip set in the first access network device. The processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the first access network device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ). Alternatively, the processing unit 1102 mainly executes internal actions of the first access network device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, 5B, 5C or 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
比如,在一个实施例中,处理单元1102用于:确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认无线链路控制RLC配置;通信单元1103用于:向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,或者,向第二接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。For example, in one embodiment, the processing unit 1102 is configured to: determine first indication information, the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use a default radio link control RLC configuration; the communication unit 1103 is configured to : Sending the first indication information to the terminal device, or sending the first indication information to a second access network device, where the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
该装置1100可以为上述实施例中的第二接入网设备、或者还可以为设置在第二接入网设备中的芯片。处理单元1102可以支持装置1100执行上文中各方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中第二接入网设备的动作。或者,处理单元1102主要执行方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中的第二接入网设备的内部动作,通信单元1103可以支持装置1100与其它设备之间的通信。The apparatus 1100 may be the second access network device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the second access network device. The processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the second access network device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ). Alternatively, the processing unit 1102 mainly executes internal actions of the second access network device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, 5B, 5C or 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
在一个实施例中,通信单元1103用于:接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信;处理单元1102用于:根据所述第二指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信。In one embodiment, the communication unit 1103 is configured to: receive second instruction information from the first access network device, the second instruction information instructing the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device The processing unit 1102 is configured to: use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device according to the second indication information.
该装置1100可以为上述实施例中的终端设备、或者还可以为设置在终端设备中的芯片。处理单元1102可以支持装置1100执行上文中各方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中终端设备的动作。或者,处理单元1102主要执行方法示例(比如图5A、图5B、5C或图6)中的终端设备的内部动作,通信单元1103可以支持装置1100与其它设备之间的通信。The apparatus 1100 may be the terminal device in the foregoing embodiments, or may also be a chip provided in the terminal device. The processing unit 1102 may support the apparatus 1100 to execute the actions of the terminal device in the above method examples (such as FIG. 5A , FIG. 5B , 5C or FIG. 6 ). Alternatively, the processing unit 1102 mainly executes the internal actions of the terminal device in the method example (such as FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, 5C or FIG. 6), and the communication unit 1103 can support communication between the apparatus 1100 and other devices.
比如,在一个实施例中,通信单元1103用于:接收来自第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;处理单元1102用于:根据所述第一指示信息,当所述终端设备处于所述非激 活态时,使用所述默认RLC配置;其中,所述第一接入网设备为最后服务所述终端设备的接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。For example, in one embodiment, the communication unit 1103 is configured to: receive first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, the first indication information indicating that when the terminal device is inactive state, using the default RLC configuration; the processing unit 1102 is configured to: according to the first indication information, when the terminal device is in the inactive state, use the default RLC configuration; wherein, the first access The network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
应理解以上装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分单元以硬件的形式实现。例如,各个单元可以为单独设立的处理元件,也可以集成在装置的某一个芯片中实现,此外,也可以以程序的形式存储于存储器中,由装置的某一个处理元件调用并执行该单元的功能。此外这些单元全部或部分可以集成在一起,也可以独立实现。这里所述的处理元件又可以成为处理器,可以是一种具有信号的处理能力的集成电路。在实现过程中,上述方法的各操作或以上各个单元可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路实现或者以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现。It should be understood that the division of units in the above device is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity or physically separated during actual implementation. And the units in the device can all be implemented in the form of software called by the processing element; they can also be implemented in the form of hardware; some units can also be implemented in the form of software called by the processing element, and some units can be implemented in the form of hardware. For example, each unit can be a separate processing element, or it can be integrated in a certain chip of the device. In addition, it can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which is called and executed by a certain processing element of the device. Function. In addition, all or part of these units can be integrated together, or implemented independently. The processing element mentioned here may also be a processor, which may be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each operation of the above method or each unit above may be realized by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element, or implemented in the form of software called by the processing element.
在一个例子中,以上任一装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如,当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是处理器,比如通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些单元可以集成在一起,以片上***(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。In one example, the units in any of the above devices may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, for example: one or more specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or, one or Multiple microprocessors (digital signal processor, DSP), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (field programmable gate array, FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. For another example, when the units in the device can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler, the processing element can be a processor, such as a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), or other processors that can call programs. For another example, these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
以上用于接收的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于从其它装置接收信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该接收单元是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路。以上用于发送的单元是一种该装置的接口电路,用于向其它装置发送信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,该发送单元是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。The above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented as a chip, the receiving unit is an interface circuit for the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices. The above sending unit is an interface circuit of the device, and is used to send signals to other devices. For example, when the device is implemented as a chip, the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
参见图12,为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图,该接入网设备(或基站)可应用于如图1所示的***架构中,执行上述方法实施例中第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的功能。如图12所示,接入网设备120可包括一个或多个DU 1201和一个或多个CU 1202。所述DU 1201可以包括至少一个天线12011,至少一个射频单元12012,至少一个处理器12013和至少一个存储器12014。所述DU 1201部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,以及部分基带处理。CU1202可以包括至少一个处理器12022和至少一个存储器12021。Referring to FIG. 12, it is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The access network device (or base station) can be applied to the system architecture shown in FIG. A function of an access network device or a second access network device. As shown in FIG. 12, the access network device 120 may include one or more DUs 1201 and one or more CUs 1202. The DU 1201 may include at least one antenna 12011, at least one radio frequency unit 12012, at least one processor 12013 and at least one memory 12014. The DU 1201 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals, conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of baseband processing. The CU 1202 may include at least one processor 12022 and at least one memory 12021 .
所述CU 1202部分主要用于进行基带处理,对接入网设备进行控制等。所述DU 1201与CU 1202可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。所述CU 1202为接入网设备的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能。例如所述CU 1202可以用于控制接入网设备执行上述方法实施例中关于接入网设备的操作流程。The CU 1202 part is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling access network equipment, and the like. The DU 1201 and the CU 1202 may be physically set together, or physically separated, that is, distributed base stations. The CU 1202 is the control center of the access network equipment, and can also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete the baseband processing function. For example, the CU 1202 may be used to control the access network device to execute the operation procedures related to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
此外,可选的,接入网设备120可以包括一个或多个射频单元,一个或多个DU和一个或多个CU。其中,DU可以包括至少一个处理器12013和至少一个存储器12014,射频单元可以包括至少一个天线12011和至少一个射频单元12012,CU可以包括至少一个处理器12022和至少一个存储器12021。In addition, optionally, the access network device 120 may include one or more radio frequency units, one or more DUs, and one or more CUs. Wherein, the DU may include at least one processor 12013 and at least one memory 12014, the radio frequency unit may include at least one antenna 12011 and at least one radio frequency unit 12012, and the CU may include at least one processor 12022 and at least one memory 12021.
在一个实例中,所述CU1202可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器12021和处理器12022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。所述DU1201可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器12014和处理器12013可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the CU1202 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can separately support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The memory 12021 and processor 12022 may serve one or more boards. That is to say, memory and processors can be set independently on each single board. It may also be that multiple single boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be set on each single board. The DU1201 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, or can separately support wireless access networks of different access standards (such as a 5G network). LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The memory 12014 and processor 12013 may serve one or more boards. That is to say, memory and processors can be set independently on each single board. It may also be that multiple single boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be set on each single board.
图12所示的接入网设备能够实现上述方法实施例中涉及接入网设备的各个过程。图12所示的接入网设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。The access network device shown in FIG. 12 can implement various processes related to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the access network device shown in FIG. 12 are respectively for realizing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here to avoid repetition.
参见图13,为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图,用于实现以上实施例中终端设备的操作。如图13所示,该终端设备包括:天线1310、射频部分1320、信号处理部分1330。天线1310与射频部分1320连接。在下行方向上,射频部分1320通过天线1310接收网络设备发送的信息,将网络设备发送的信息发送给信号处理部分1330进行处理。在上行方向上,信号处理部分1330对终端设备的信息进行处理,并发送给射频部分1320,射频部分1320对终端设备的信息进行处理后经过天线1310发送给网络设备。Referring to FIG. 13 , it is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which is used to implement operations of the terminal device in the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 13 , the terminal device includes: an antenna 1310 , a radio frequency part 1320 , and a signal processing part 1330 . The antenna 1310 is connected to the radio frequency part 1320 . In the downlink direction, the radio frequency part 1320 receives the information sent by the network device through the antenna 1310, and sends the information sent by the network device to the signal processing part 1330 for processing. In the uplink direction, the signal processing part 1330 processes the information of the terminal device and sends it to the radio frequency part 1320 , and the radio frequency part 1320 processes the information of the terminal device and sends it to the network device through the antenna 1310 .
信号处理部分1330可以包括调制解调子***,用于实现对数据各通信协议层的处理;还可以包括中央处理子***,用于实现对终端设备操作***以及应用层的处理;此外,还可以包括其它子***,例如多媒体子***,周边子***等,其中多媒体子***用于实现对终端设备相机,屏幕显示等的控制,周边子***用于实现与其它设备的连接。调制解调子***可以为单独设置的芯片。The signal processing part 1330 may include a modulation and demodulation subsystem, which is used to realize the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data; it may also include a central processing subsystem, which is used to realize the processing of the operating system and the application layer of the terminal equipment; in addition, it may also Including other subsystems, such as multimedia subsystems, peripheral subsystems, etc., wherein the multimedia subsystem is used to realize the control of the terminal equipment camera, screen display, etc., and the peripheral subsystem is used to realize the connection with other devices. The modem subsystem can be a separate chip.
调制解调子***可以包括一个或多个处理元件1331,例如,包括一个主控CPU和其它集成电路。此外,该调制解调子***还可以包括存储元件1332和接口电路1333。存储元件1332用于存储数据和程序,但用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可能不存储于该存储元件1332中,而是存储于调制解调子***之外的存储器中,使用时调制解调子***加载使用。接口电路1333用于与其它子***通信。The modem subsystem may include one or more processing elements 1331, including, for example, a master CPU and other integrated circuits. In addition, the modem subsystem may further include a storage element 1332 and an interface circuit 1333 . The storage element 1332 is used to store data and programs, but the program used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the above methods may not be stored in the storage element 1332, but stored in a memory outside the modem subsystem, When used, the modem subsystem is loaded and used. Interface circuit 1333 is used to communicate with other subsystems.
该调制解调子***可以通过芯片实现,该芯片包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中处理元件用于执行以上终端设备执行的任一种方法的各个步骤,接口电路用于与其它装置通信。在一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现,例如用于终端设备的装置包括处理元件和存储元件,处理元件调用存储元件存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。存储元件可以为与处理元件处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件。The modem subsystem can be realized by a chip, and the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to execute each step of any method performed by the terminal device above, and the interface circuit is used to communicate with other devices. In one implementation, the unit for the terminal device to implement each step in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler. For example, the device for the terminal device includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the program stored in the storage element to Execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment. The storage element may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing element, that is, an on-chip storage element.
在另一种实现中,用于执行以上方法中终端设备所执行的方法的程序可以在与处理元件处于不同芯片上的存储元件,即片外存储元件。此时,处理元件从片外存储元件调用或加载程序于片内存储元件上,以调用并执行以上方法实施例中终端设备执行的方法。In another implementation, the program for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the above method may be stored in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element. At this time, the processing element invokes or loads a program from the off-chip storage element on the on-chip storage element, so as to invoke and execute the method performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
在又一种实现中,终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以是被配置成一个或多个处理元件,这些处理元件设置于调制解调子***上,这里的处理元件可以为集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA,或者这些类集 成电路的组合。这些集成电路可以集成在一起,构成芯片。In yet another implementation, the unit of the terminal device that implements each step in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are set on the modem subsystem, where the processing elements may be integrated circuits, For example: one or more ASICs, or one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form a chip.
终端设备实现以上方法中各个步骤的单元可以集成在一起,以SOC的形式实现,该SOC芯片,用于实现以上方法。该芯片内可以集成至少一个处理元件和存储元件,由处理元件调用存储元件的存储的程序的形式实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,该芯片内可以集成至少一个集成电路,用于实现以上终端设备执行的方法;或者,可以结合以上实现方式,部分单元的功能通过处理元件调用程序的形式实现,部分单元的功能通过集成电路的形式实现。The units of the terminal device for implementing each step in the above method can be integrated together and implemented in the form of an SOC, and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method. The chip may integrate at least one processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls the stored program of the storage element to realize the method executed by the above terminal device; or, the chip may integrate at least one integrated circuit for realizing the above terminal The method executed by the device; or, the above implementation manners may be combined, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of calling programs by processing elements, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
可见,以上用于终端设备的装置可以包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路,其中至少一个处理元件用于执行以上方法实施例所提供的任一种终端设备执行的方法。处理元件可以以第一种方式:即调用存储元件存储的程序的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;也可以以第二种方式:即通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路结合指令的方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤;当然,也可以结合第一种方式和第二种方式执行终端设备执行的部分或全部步骤。It can be seen that the above apparatus for a terminal device may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, where at least one processing element is configured to execute any method performed by the terminal device provided in the above method embodiments. The processing element can perform some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device in the first way: that is, by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element combined with instructions Part or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may be performed in a manner; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the terminal device may also be performed in combination with the first method and the second method.
这里的处理元件同以上描述,可以通过处理器实现,处理元件的功能可以和图11中所描述的处理单元的功能相同。示例性地,处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如CPU,还可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个微处理器DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA等,或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。存储元件可以通过存储器实现,存储元件的功能可以和图11中所描述的存储单元的功能相同。存储元件可以是一个存储器,也可以是多个存储器的统称。The processing elements here are the same as those described above, and may be implemented by a processor, and the functions of the processing elements may be the same as those of the processing unit described in FIG. 11 . Exemplarily, the processing element may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, and may also be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as: one or more ASICs, or, one or more microprocessors DSP , or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. The storage element can be implemented by a memory, and the function of the storage element can be the same as that of the storage unit described in FIG. 11 . A storage element may be one memory, or a general term for multiple memories.
图13所示的终端设备能够实现上述方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。图13所示的终端设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。The terminal device shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes related to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the terminal device shown in FIG. 13 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here to avoid repetition.
本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一种”是指一种或者多种,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably. "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, ordinal numerals such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、***、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art should understand that the embodiments of the present application may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(***)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现 在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It should be understood that each procedure and/or block in the flowchart and/or block diagram, and a combination of procedures and/or blocks in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be realized by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or processor of other programmable data processing equipment to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing equipment produce a An apparatus for realizing the functions specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a specific manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions The device realizes the function specified in one or more procedures of the flowchart and/or one or more blocks of the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, thereby The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow chart or blocks of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.
Claims (31)
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于第一接入网设备或者所述第一接入网设备中的芯片,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a first access network device or a chip in the first access network device, and the method includes:确定第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认无线链路控制RLC配置;Determine first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use a default radio link control RLC configuration;向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,或者,向第二接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的无线接入网通知区域RNA。sending the first indication information to the terminal device, or sending the first indication information to a second access network device, where the second access network device is located in the wireless access network notification area of the terminal device RNA.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the sending the first indication information to the terminal device comprises:向所述终端设备发送第一无线资源控制RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息。Sending a first radio resource control RRC release message to the terminal device, where the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information.
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向第二接入网设备发送所述第一指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the sending the first indication information to the second access network device comprises:向所述第二接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。sending a first paging message to the second access network device, where the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device, and the first paging message includes the the first instruction information.
- 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息对应第一区域,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备位于第一区域且处于非激活态时,使用所述默认RLC配置;其中,所述第一区域包括所述终端设备的RNA。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first indication information corresponds to the first area, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is located in the first area and is inactive In the state, use the default RLC configuration; wherein, the first area includes the RNA of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一区域包括一个或多个小区,所述第一指示信息包括所述一个或多个小区的标识。The method according to claim 4, wherein the first area includes one or more cells, and the first indication information includes identities of the one or more cells.
- 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息对应M个RLC层实体,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,所述M个RLC层实体使用所述默认RLC配置,其中,M为正整数。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the first indication information corresponds to M RLC layer entities, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, The M RLC layer entities use the default RLC configuration, where M is a positive integer.
- 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一无线承载的标识,所述M个RLC层实体为所述第一无线承载对应的RLC层实体。The method according to claim 6, wherein the first indication information includes an identifier of a first radio bearer, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities corresponding to the first radio bearer.
- 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括至少一种RLC模式,所述M个RLC层实体为使用所述至少一种RLC模式的RLC层实体。The method according to claim 6, wherein the first indication information includes at least one RLC mode, and the M RLC layer entities are RLC layer entities using the at least one RLC mode.
- 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息对应传输方向,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,在所述传输方向上使用所述默认RLC配置。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the first indication information corresponds to a transmission direction, and the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, in the The default RLC configuration is used in the transmit direction.
- 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第二接入网设备支持所述默认RLC配置。Receive capability information from the second access network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
- 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, further comprising:向所述第二接入网设备发送第一RLC协议数据单元PDU,所述第一RLC PDU是所述第一接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;Sending a first RLC protocol data unit PDU to the second access network device, where the first RLC PDU is obtained by the first access network device using the default RLC configuration processing;其中,所述第一RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。Wherein, the first RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue remain in the inactive state.
- 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, further comprising:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二RLC PDU,所述第二RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据;receiving a second RLC PDU from the second access network device, where the second RLC PDU includes uplink data of the terminal device;使用所述默认RLC配置对所述第二RLC PDU进行处理得到第一PDCP PDU。Using the default RLC configuration to process the second RLC PDU to obtain the first PDCP PDU.
- 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that the method further comprises:向所述第二接入网设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。Sending third indication information to the second access network device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to use the RLC configuration included in the stored context information of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, further comprising:向所述第二接入网设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信。Sending second indication information to the second access network device, where the second indication information instructs the second access network device to use the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the method further comprises:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二PDCP PDU,所述第二PDCP PDU是所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;其中,所述第二PDCP PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据。receiving a second PDCP PDU from the second access network device, where the second PDCP PDU is obtained by processing the second access network device using the default RLC configuration; wherein the second PDCP PDU includes Uplink data of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 15, further comprising:向所述第二接入网设备发送锚点重定位信息和所述终端设备的上下文信息,所述锚点重定位信息用于指示不执行锚点重定位,所述上下文信息不包括所述终端设备的部分或全部RLC配置。sending anchor relocation information and context information of the terminal device to the second access network device, where the anchor relocation information is used to indicate that anchor relocation is not performed, and the context information does not include the terminal Partial or full RLC configuration of the device.
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于第二接入网设备或者所述第二接入网设备中的芯片,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a second access network device or a chip in the second access network device, and the method includes:接收来自第一接入网设备的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述第二接入网设备使用默认RLC配置与终端设备进行通信;Receive second indication information from the first access network device, where the second indication information instructs the second access network device to use a default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device;根据所述第二指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述终端设备进行通信;Using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the terminal device according to the second indication information;其中,所述第一接入网设备为最后服务所述终端设备的接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。Wherein, the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, further comprising:接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一寻呼消息,所述第一寻呼消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备寻呼所述终端设备,所述第一寻呼消息包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,使用所述默认RLC配置;receiving a first paging message from the first access network device, where the first paging message is used to instruct the second access network device to page the terminal device, and the first paging message includes first indication information, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use the default RLC configuration;根据所述第一寻呼消息,发送第二寻呼消息,所述第二寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第二寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。Sending a second paging message according to the first paging message, where the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
- 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17 or 18, further comprising:向所述终端设备发送第三RLC PDU,所述第三RLC PDU是所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;sending a third RLC PDU to the terminal device, where the third RLC PDU is obtained by processing the second access network device using the default RLC configuration;其中,所述第三RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。Wherein, the third RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue remain in the inactive state.
- 根据权利要求17至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, further comprising:接收来自所述终端设备的第四RLC PDU,所述第四RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的上行数据或RRC恢复请求消息;Receive a fourth RLC PDU from the terminal device, where the fourth RLC PDU includes uplink data or an RRC recovery request message of the terminal device;使用所述默认RLC配置对所述第四RLC PDU进行处理得到第三PDCP PDU。Using the default RLC configuration to process the fourth RLC PDU to obtain a third PDCP PDU.
- 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the method further comprises:向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。Sending third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to use the RLC configuration included in the stored context information of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求17至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 17 to 21, further comprising:接收来自所述第一接入网设备的锚点重定位信息和终端设备的上下文信息,所述锚点重定位信息用于指示不执行锚点重定位,所述上下文信息不包括所述终端设备的部分或全部RLC配置。receiving anchor relocation information from the first access network device and context information of the terminal device, where the anchor relocation information is used to indicate that anchor relocation is not performed, and the context information does not include the terminal device Part or all of the RLC configuration.
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于终端设备或者所述终端设备中的芯片,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method is applicable to a terminal device or a chip in the terminal device, and the method includes:接收来自第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示当所述终端设备处于非激活态时,使用默认RLC配置;Receive first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, where the first indication information indicates that when the terminal device is in an inactive state, use a default RLC configuration;根据所述第一指示信息,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第一接入网设备和/或所述第二接入网设备进行通信;Using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the first access network device and/or the second access network device according to the first indication information;其中,所述第一接入网设备为最后服务所述终端设备的接入网设备,所述第二接入网设备位于所述终端设备的RNA。Wherein, the first access network device is the access network device that finally serves the terminal device, and the second access network device is located in the RNA of the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收来自第一接入网设备或第二接入网设备的第一指示信息,包括:The method according to claim 23, wherein the receiving the first indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device comprises:接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一RRC释放消息,所述第一RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备进入非激活态,所述第一RRC释放消息包括所述第一指示信息;或者,receiving a first RRC release message from the first access network device, the first RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to enter an inactive state, and the first RRC release message includes the first indication information ;or,接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二寻呼消息,所述第二寻呼消息用于寻呼所述终端设备,所述第二寻呼消息包括所述第一指示信息。receiving a second paging message from the second access network device, where the second paging message is used to page the terminal device, and the second paging message includes the first indication information.
- 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the method further comprises:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述第二接入网设备支持所述默认RLC配置。Receive capability information from the second access network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the second access network device supports the default RLC configuration.
- 根据权利要求23至25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第二接入网设备进行通信,包括:The method according to any one of claims 23 to 25, wherein using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes:接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第五RLC PDU,所述第五RLC PDU是所述第一接入网设备或所述第二接入网设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的;receiving a fifth RLC PDU from the second access network device, where the fifth RLC PDU is obtained by processing the first access network device or the second access network device using the default RLC configuration;其中,所述第五RLC PDU包括所述终端设备的下行数据或第二RRC释放消息,所述第二RRC释放消息用于指示所述终端设备结束在所述非激活态下的数据传输并继续保持在所述非激活态。Wherein, the fifth RLC PDU includes downlink data of the terminal device or a second RRC release message, and the second RRC release message is used to instruct the terminal device to end data transmission in the inactive state and continue remain in the inactive state.
- 根据权利要求23至26中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,使用所述默认RLC配置与所述第二接入网设备进行通信,包括:The method according to any one of claims 23 to 26, wherein using the default RLC configuration to communicate with the second access network device includes:向所述第二接入网设备发送第六RLC PDU,所述第六RLC PDU是所述终端设备使用所述默认RLC配置处理得到的,所述第六RLC PDU包括RRC恢复请求消息或上行数据。sending a sixth RLC PDU to the second access network device, the sixth RLC PDU is obtained by the terminal device using the default RLC configuration processing, and the sixth RLC PDU includes an RRC recovery request message or uplink data .
- 根据权利要求23至27中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 23 to 27, further comprising:接收来自所述第一接入网设备或所述第二接入网设备的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示所述终端设备切换为使用存储的所述终端设备的上下文信息中所包括的RLC配置。receiving third indication information from the first access network device or the second access network device, where the third indication information instructs the terminal device to switch to using the stored context information of the terminal device. RLC configuration included.
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至28中任一项所述方法的模块。A communication device, characterized by comprising a module for performing the method according to any one of claims 1-28.
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器和存储器耦合,所述存储器中存储有计算机程序;所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中的计算机程序,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至28任一所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, and a computer program is stored in the memory; the processor is used to call the computer program in the memory, so that the communication device executes A method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 28.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时,实现如权利要求1至28中任一项所述方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein a computer program or instruction is stored in the storage medium, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28 is realized .
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202111486593.3 | 2021-12-07 | ||
CN202111486593.3A CN116248237A (en) | 2021-12-07 | 2021-12-07 | Communication method and device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023103958A1 true WO2023103958A1 (en) | 2023-06-15 |
Family
ID=86635363
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2022/136579 WO2023103958A1 (en) | 2021-12-07 | 2022-12-05 | Communication method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN116248237A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023103958A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN111586886A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Control method and device for wireless backhaul link |
WO2020189958A1 (en) * | 2019-03-15 | 2020-09-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Small data transmission without path switch procedure |
CN112586052A (en) * | 2018-08-09 | 2021-03-30 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Pre-configured dedicated resources for idle mode transmissions |
CN113498152A (en) * | 2020-04-01 | 2021-10-12 | 夏普株式会社 | Method performed by user equipment and user equipment |
-
2021
- 2021-12-07 CN CN202111486593.3A patent/CN116248237A/en active Pending
-
2022
- 2022-12-05 WO PCT/CN2022/136579 patent/WO2023103958A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN112586052A (en) * | 2018-08-09 | 2021-03-30 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Pre-configured dedicated resources for idle mode transmissions |
CN111586886A (en) * | 2019-02-15 | 2020-08-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Control method and device for wireless backhaul link |
WO2020189958A1 (en) * | 2019-03-15 | 2020-09-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Small data transmission without path switch procedure |
CN113498152A (en) * | 2020-04-01 | 2021-10-12 | 夏普株式会社 | Method performed by user equipment and user equipment |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Small data transmission with RA-based schemes", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2103903, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. E-meeting; 20210412 - 20210420, 2 April 2021 (2021-04-02), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052175225 * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN116248237A (en) | 2023-06-09 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10880789B2 (en) | Method for establishing a fronthaul interface, method for performing access for a UE, method and apparatus for performing a handover for a UE, data forwarding method, user equipment and base station | |
EP3512275B1 (en) | Data transmission method, device and system | |
WO2018019001A1 (en) | Terminal state conversion method and apparatus | |
WO2020191781A1 (en) | Data transmission method and apparatus | |
WO2021196249A1 (en) | Rrc state configuration method and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2021062797A1 (en) | Configuration method and apparatus | |
WO2022089525A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
CN115699816A (en) | Method for sidelink relay communication under dual connectivity | |
WO2021031035A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2022206393A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2022141332A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2023103958A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2022073395A1 (en) | Communication method and device | |
WO2021213014A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
CN115529662A (en) | Communication method and device | |
WO2021078170A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2022027523A1 (en) | Auxiliary information configuration method and communication apparatus | |
JP2023526459A (en) | Enhanced buffer status reporting | |
WO2022267883A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2024146301A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2023185956A1 (en) | Sidelink-based communication method and apparatus, and storage medium and chip system | |
WO2023134332A1 (en) | Communication method and system | |
WO2023160706A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2024140489A1 (en) | Energy saving method and apparatus | |
WO2024007895A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22903380 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |